Home

SIPLUS CMS4000 X-Tools - User Manual

1. the following offline data must be loaded fi amp if RY calculate the warning band first XY Envelope StatusWarning ClcXYEnv x S y 1024 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 XY Envelope XBufferWarning XY Envelope UpperWarningBand XY Envelope LowerWarningBand calculate the error band next XY Envelope StatusError ClcXYEnv x S y 1024 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 XY Envelope XBufferError XY Envelope UpperErrorBand XY Envelope LowerErrorBand The created envelopes can be stored Afterwards they can be loaded at any time in order to use them together with the Analyzing Function MonitorXYEnvelope for the monitoring of the current x and y data against the cal culated envelopes English Release 2012 09 157 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 7 4 5 3 Visualization of X Y Envelopes The output of each call to CalculatexYEnvelope are three 1 dimensional buffers which are ideal for the follow ing monitoring through the Analyzing Function MonitorxYEnvelope However in case the envelopes shall be visualized together with the original input data within a MTC yx T001 the Analyzing Function Convert Buffer1 DToTimeSeries must be used in order to convert each 1 dimensional buffer into a time series The following box shows the Analyzing Script 30 Prepare Visualization of XY Envelope from the example location which shows how ConvertBuffer1 DToTimeSeries
2. cccseecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeanees 168 7 4 1 5 Loading with Loading Profiles and Loading Times ssseeeeeseseeesesrreseerrsseerrssrerrsserenesne 168 74 7 6 Loading of the last Minutes of the Data from a Storage Profile eeceeeeeeteeeeeneees 169 7 4 1 1 Loading of the last Files from a Storage Profile once esesseeeseeerreseerreseerrsserrrresne 169 74 7 8 Loading of the last Files from a Storage Profile automatically ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 170 7 4 1 9 SUMIMANY AEE A TE T E ieee dee nee E E E EA EE E E eae tis 170 7 4 8 Advanced parallel Storin sicscicisedecccitacaseetente aE E AA EE EAER 171 English Release 2012 09 8 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 7 4 8 1 7 4 8 2 7 4 8 3 7 4 8 4 8 8 1 8 1 1 8 1 1 1 8 1 1 2 8 1 1 3 8 2 8 2 1 8 2 2 8 2 3 8 2 4 8 2 5 8 3 8 3 1 8 4 8 4 1 8 4 2 8 4 3 8 4 4 9 10 English Genea eedetitesesstecees ts tibet atta E A Se Atei eer eitete tential thie Mas 171 Plant SiIMUIAtION i eteeeencecseiet ete eee sitet ies E een Renee 172 Slagge Profiles chet iee hel ld eee dein tata ie dei etnies eae 172 SUMMMANY OE ETEA E canteen dete ete eee and 173 Reference Part Overview j 054 442 Sada els Ae CAMs eee Ate wee TEOR AAAA 174 Pa eO E a e cls Meine dase ed ae E a tiaadedne 174 Controls ce eni E bbicele bbiatine sabiecelaabiccle bhdictadhd teeeat dapstedipbicgcetha mca pecan 174 LEE SE 0a eid ae ale eek a ae ae ee ees 174
3. n m w m N Oo N A UO ws oO WO Figure 64 Example of a Frequency Spectrum and of an Order Spectrum The frequency spectrum is displayed at the top of the figure above The two sine waves can be seen at the ac cording frequencies with their amplitudes The smearing of the peaks is caused by the leakage effect The calculated order spectrum is shown at the lower part of the figure The unit of the x axis is not anymore Hertz Hz but orders 1 Since the trigger signal was defined as an impulse signal with a constant frequency of 10 Hz each order represents 10 Hz According to this the order spectrum consists out of two peaks The first peak is at order 1 with amplitude around 5 and the second peak at order 10 with amplitude around 10 English Release 2012 09 153 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 7 4 4 Sequence Control 7 4 4 1 General This chapter shows different methods which can be used together with the sequence control First it shows how to use the Analyzing Functions Start and Stop in order to safely start a Configuration File Safely means that in case a Configuration File suspends it will be stopped before moving on in the sequential calculation Second it will be shown how to define an alarm dependent storing in parallel to a time dependent storing The provided Analyzing S
4. TimeProviders NtpServer InputProvider Registry Key New Value Config AnnounceFlags 5 Config FrequencyCorrectRate 4 Config LargePhaseOffset 1280000 Config HoldPeriod 5 Config MaxAllowedPhase Offset 300 Config PhaseCorrectRate 7 Config SpikeWatchPeriod 90 Config Updatelnterval 30000 Parameters NtpServer YourNTPServerName 0x1 Parameters Type NTP TimeProviders NtpClient Enabled 1 TimeProviders NtpClient InputProvider 1 TimeProviders NtpClient SpecialPolllnterval 60 1 1 Depending to the location of the computer other time servers may be more suitable than time windows com A list of available time servers can be found at http support ntp org bin view Servers StratumTwoTimeServers and at other locations in the Internet English Release 2012 09 139 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 7 2 5 Microsoft Hotfix 951531 When you start a Windows XP based computer the Windows time service W32Time obtains the current time from the CMOS clock and sets this time to the system time This system time is synchronized with the time server by the W32Time service Meanwhile the CMOS time runs independently of the time at the time server When the W32Time service stops either because the system shuts down or the service is stopped the system time is an accurate reflection of the time at the time server However the W32Time service does
5. e transforms the 1 dimensional buffer from the time domain into the frequency domain OutSpm e writes the calculated spectrum data to the system English Release 2012 09 145 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 7 4 1 3 Example A concrete example is provided in order to show a real life application The hereby used Analyzing Model File similar to the above screenshot see FFT 01 can be found within the example location which is being deliv ered together with X Tools Input Signal The input signal in this example is a simple sine wave with a frequency of 5 Hz and an amplitude of 10 5 700 25 a0 25 500 26 000 26 100 26 boo 26 500 26 400 26 500 13 14 at 25 548 ss mmm Gl 2011 01 13 14 37 26 548 ss mmm GMT 01 00 Figure 55 Example of the Input Signal for the Frequency Analysis Spectrum The following screenshot shows the calculated frequency spectrum of the input signal The spectrum displays the expected peak at the frequency of 5 Hz with the amplitude of 10 re aonne Bas with absolute Te Anes 2011 01 13 15 38 52 503 000 000 GMT 01 00 real FFTForsional k ma iod gt m alla la i Figure 56 Example of a Frequency Spectrum which has been calculated by the Frequency Analysis English Release 2012 09 146 182 S
6. e sequential processing of analyzing tasks var PerformSequentialCalculations start the Interface Profile which enables the simulated devices Start Simulation T001 ipf xts DoNotWait start the Device Profiles of the simulated devices Start ION AnalogInput TO01 dpf xts DoNotWait Start ION SIMATIC S7 PN dpf xts DoNotWait execute the desired calculations one after the other Start Sequence Control Sequence Control 0Ol amf xts Wait Start Sequence Control Sequence Control 02 asf xts Wait store the calculated data Start Sequence Control 01 spf xts Wait stop the Device Profiles Stop ION AnalogInput T001 dpf xts Stop ION SIMATIC S7 PN dpf xts stop the Interface Profile Stop Simulation T001 ipf xts remove the calculated data RemoveData Sequence Control Sequence Control 01l amf xts RemoveData Sequence Control Sequence Control 02 asf xts English Release 2012 09 113 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction parallel processing of analyzing tasks SIPLUS CMS var PerformParallelCalculations start the Interface Profile which enables the simulated devices Start Simulation TO01 ipf xts DoNotWait start the Device Profiles of the simulated devices Start ION VIB A TOO1 dpf xts DoNotWait Start IFN VIB ACC dpf xts DoNo
7. English Release 2012 09 180 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction 9 List of Abbreviations SIPLUS CMS Abbreviation Description AME Analyzing Model Editor ANF Analyzing Function ANS Analyzing System ANX Analyzing System Explorer ASE Analyzing Script Editor CMM Communication Module CTN Control Node DMS Device Management System DMX Device Management System Explorer DPE Device Profile Editor GOE Global Options Editor IFM Interface Module IFN Interface Node IOM O Module Input Output Module ION O Node Input Output Node IPE Interface Profile Editor LPE Loading Profile Editor MDS Master Data System MDX Master Data System Explorer MMS Main Management System MMX Main Management System Explorer MPE Main Profile Editor MTC Monitoring Chart MTS Monitoring System MTX Monitoring System Explorer MVE Monitoring View Editor ODL Offline Data Loader UAE User Accounts Editor SLV System Log Viewer SPE Storage Profile Editor STS Storage System STX Storage System Explorer UFE User Function Editor UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply USF User Function XTC X Tools Client XTS X Tools Server XTT X Tools Tray XTV X Tools Service English Release 2012 09 181 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 10 Contact Information
8. Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Online Data gt All Online Data branch of the MDS Explorer Functionality e Method 1 for the creation of a new Monitoring View o Within the MTS Explorer expand the Main gt Editors gt Monitoring View Editors branch o Drag the MVE Standard T001 with the left mouse into the empty space at the right side of the MTS Explorer An empty MVE Standard T001 is opened automatically o Press the New button in order to create a new Monitoring View The new Monitoring View is displayed by the MVE Standard T001 with default values It does not contain any charts yet o Within the MTS Explorer expand the Main gt Editors gt Monitoring Charts branch o Drag the MTC yt T001 with the left mouse into the opened Monitoring View An empty MTC yt T001 is opened automatically Incase the MTC yt T001 is dragged from the MTS Explorer into the empty Monitoring System the MVE Standard T001 is opened automatically and also opens an empty MTC yt T001 o This method works in all cases even in case there is no X Tools Server connected at the moment and or in case the desired target data is not available at the moment It can be used for the creation and pre configuration of Monitoring Views for cases where the target X Tools Server and or the target data are not present at the moment e Method 2 for the creation of a new Monitoring View o Within the MDS Explorer expand the Main gt S
9. X Tools Edition Needed license Keys SIPLUS CMS X Tools Demo no license needed SIPLUS CMS X Tools Standard X Tools Standard SIPLUS CMS X Tools Professional X Tools Standard X Tools Multi Client X Tools Advanced Analysis English Release 2012 09 20 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS The current edition of the X Tools Server can be seen within the MMS Explorer below MMS Explorer gt Serv ers gt YourServer gt Info and within the System Log Viewer SSi Servers S A YOURSERVER Be PD Info Connection State Connected Authorization State Logged in as Administrator Server SIPLUS CMS4000 X Tools Server Version 03 04 Edition Professional Status OK Connected Clients 1 Figure 1 Edition of the X Tools Server within the MMS Explorer No Eny 3 Current license SIPLUS CMS X Tools 03 05 Professional System Log Entries B Figure 2 Edition of the X Tools Server within the System Log Viewer An additional license is needed for using of software I O Nodes which are able to access various SIMATIC or SIMOTION devices Whenever the Device Profile of a software I O Node is to be started by the X Tools Server another according license must be available The license for software I O Nodes is leased at the start of the Device Profile and released at its stop again In case the necessary license is not available the according Device Profile can not start and s
10. chapter AME Standard T001 and chapter Analyzing Functions Try it out gt Create a new Analyzing Model gt Build an easy Analyzing Model which takes two online data from the MDS Explorer adds them together and outputs the result gt Move the functions around within the Analyzing Model gt Change the visualization of some functions e g turn on off the values of the input arguments or expand and collapse the function gt Save the Analyzing Model At the first save the Save As dialog will pop up and offers a default file name Change the default file name to Hello Analyzing Model and press OK in order to save it to the disk The new Analyzing Model now is displayed below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Analyzing Model Files branch of the ANS Explorer English Release 2012 09 83 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS gt Take a look onto the Analyzing Models which are provided via the example location see point 6 5 in or der to see various application examples about the capabilities and usage of Analyzing Models Ready At this point you know how to create a new Analyzing Model which can be used in order to perform calculations based on online and or offline data 6 13 3 Opening of existing Analyzing Models Open the ANS Explorer e Open the Analyzing System and ensure that the ANS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the
11. e Open the Analyzing System and ensure that the ANS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Ana lyzing System workspace e Ensure that you have several data available below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Online Data gt All Online Data and Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Offline Data gt All Offline Data branches of the MDS Explorer Functionality e Within the ANS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Analyzing Model Files branch e Click onto any of the present Analyzing Models with the right mouse button in order to open the context menu e In order to start the currently selected Analyzing Model choose Start from the context menu o Multiple Analyzing Models can be running simultaneously and without any dependencies between each other e The configured data of each started Analyzing Model is found within the MDS Explorer below its Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Online Data gt All Online Data in case of output data class Online Data or Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Offline Data gt All Offline Data in case of output data class Offline Data branch From there the data can be moved to all systems of X Tools for further processing via Drag amp Drop e In order to stop a currently running Analyzing Model call the context menu of this Analyzing Model and choose Stop e There are seve
12. e Opening of Files via the Explorer of Windows 6 29 2 Important Facts The global options of the X Tools Client contain the parameter X Tools Files within the File Associations group In case the value of this parameter is Associate X Tools Files with the X Tools Client the X Tools Cli ent ensures during each startup that the following file types are associated to it through Windows e xtc e xts e wav After a double click onto an associated file within the Explorer of Windows the X Tools Client is started through Windows and starts to open the chosen files In case the X Tools Client was running already before the double click the already present X Tools Client opens the chosen files and no new X Tools Client is started 6 29 3 Opening of Files via the Explorer of Windows Open the Explorer of Windows e Start X Tools and terminate afterwards in order to ensure that X Tools can configure the file associa tions e Ensure that neither the X Tools Server nor the X Tools Client are running e Open the Explorer of Windows Functionality e The following types of files can be opened by the X Tools Client directly without the X Tools Server o Main Profiles o Interface Profiles o Device Profiles o Monitoring Views o Analyzing Models o Analyzing Scripts o Storage Profiles o Loading Profiles o System Log Files o Global Options Files o User Accounts Files English Release 2012 09 134 182 SIPLUS CMS X To
13. StoringInterval run measurement task PerformCalculations StoreNow reset the storing flag StoreNow false English Release 2012 09 154 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction e measurement and analyzing tasks which start and stop the different Configuration Files SIPLUS CMS var PerformCalculations var StoreNow start the Interface Profile which enables the simulated devices Start Simulation T001 ipf xts DoNotWait start the Device Profiles of the simulated devices Start ION AnalogInput TO01 dpf xts DoNotWait execute the desired calculations one after the other using SafeStart SafeStart Sequence Control Sequence Control 01 amf xts 100 SafeStart Sequence Control Sequence Control 03 amf xts 100 AlarmSignal is generated by Sequence Control 03 amf xts in case of an Alarm var Alarm IsDataPrsnt AlarmSignal store only if an alarm happened or the time interval has passed if Alarm StoreNow store the calculated data SafeStart Sequence Control 03 spf xts 100 stop the Device Profiles Stop ION AnalogInput T0O01 dpf xts Stop ION SIMATIC S7 PN dpf xts stop the Interface Profile Stop Simulation T001 ipf xts remove the calculated data RemoveData Sequence Control Sequence Control 0l amf xts RemoveData Sequence Control Sequence Control 03 amf xts Engli
14. User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 21 Storing of Data Snapshots out of the Monitoring System 6 21 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn how to store a snapshot of the data which is currently being visualized by the Moni toring System This chapter contains the following topics e Storing of Data Snapshots 6 21 2 Storing of Data Snapshots Open a Monitoring View e Open a Monitoring View and display data with at least two different Monitoring Charts for example one MTC yt T001 and one MTC yx T001 Functionality e Press the Store Data Snapshot button from the Toolbar Area of one Monitoring Chart in order to create a snapshot of the currently visualized data e The functionality of the data snapshot can be configured to either store only the data from the Monitoring Chart whose Store Data Shapshot button has been pressed or to store all of the data from all Monitoring Charts of the current Monitoring View o The scope of the data snapshot current Monitoring Chart or current Monitoring View can be config ured via the Data Snapshot Scope menu item of the context menu of the Store Data Snapshot button and via the Data Snapshot Scope parameter of the Chart Options dialog e Incase of Monitoring Charts which display a time interval of data e g the MTC yt T001 or the MTC yx T001 the currently displayed time interval of the currently displayed data is being stored e Incase of Monitoring Charts which dis
15. can be used var main the following Analyzing Script must be started before this one 20 Create XY Envelope convert the x buffer of the warning bands to a time series ConvB1iDToTS XY Envelope XBufferWarning XY Envelope XBufferWarningTS End with Input Data Time 0 029296875 convert the upper warning band to a time series ConvB1DToTS XY Envelope UpperWarningBand XY Envelope UpperWarningBandTS End with Input Data Time 0 029296875 convert the lower warning band to a time series ConvB1DToTS XY Envelope LowerWarningBand XY Envelope LowerWarningBandTS End with Input Data Time 0 029296875 convert the x buffer of the error bands to a time series ConvB1DToTS XY Envelope XBufferError XY Envelope XBufferErrorTS End with Input Data Time 0 029296875 convert the upper error band to a time series ConvB1DToTS XY Envelope UpperErrorBand XY Envelope UpperErrorBandTS End with Input Data Time 0 029296875 convert the lower error band to a time series ConvB1iDToTS XY Envelope LowerErrorBand XY Envelope LowerErrorBandTS End with Input Data Time 0 029296875 For the x and y input data which is delivered together with X Tools we know that their time interval is 30 sec onds this information can be read from the MDS Explorer when the data is loaded When the time series which is output by ConvertBuffer1 DToTimeSeries shal
16. e The following screenshot shows an example of a new Analyzing Model Analyzing Model Settings oS Analyzing Model Parameters EJ Offline Time Configuration J Treatment of Status Codes Save As Convert Close Figure 37 AME Standard T001 with a new Analyzing Model e The Analyzing Model Settings table at the top of the AME Standard T001 displays the general file infor mation and allows entering additional file attributes like a description and the name of the author of the file and his company e Within the Analyzing Model Parameters table the basic parameters for the execution of the Analyzing Model are being defined o The default configuration of Analyzing Models typically allows executing the defined analysis without additional changes to the parameters o Fora detailed description of the meaning and usage of the parameters of Analyzing Models refer to the reference manual of the Analyzing System chapter Analyzing Model Editors English Release 2012 09 82 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS e Within the Offline Time Configuration table the time interval onto which the calculation shall be applied is being defined The contents of this table can be configured only in case the output data class is specified as Offline data o The default configuration of Analyzing Models typically allows executing the defined analysis without additional changes to the offline
17. y The y data which has been generated via the Analyzing Model 10 Create Reference x and y Data 7 4 6 Spectrum Envelopes 7 4 6 1 General This chapter shows how to use the Analyzing System in order to create spectrum envelopes how to visualize the calculated envelopes and how to use them for monitoring of current online data against violation of these envelopes The visualizations Analyzing Models and Analyzing Scripts from this chapter can be tried out because the input data and the Analyzing Models Analyzing Scripts are delivered together with X Tools The input data is found within the Server User Example Offline Files X Tools Offline Data Files Measurement Tasks Spectrum Enve lopes path of the X Tools installation and must be loaded from there whereas the used Analyzing Models Analyzing Scripts and Monitoring Views are part of the example location which is delivered together with X Tools The Measurement Tasks Spectrum Envelopes subdirectory of each Configuration File type contains the Configuration Files to which the following descriptions refer see also point 7 4 6 6 The provided input data has been created by storing of the output of the 10 Create Reference Spectrum Ana lyzing Model from the example location For the generation of an online spectrum which also shows violations of the calculated envelopes the 30 Simulate Spectrum with Errors Analyzing Model Analyzing Script from the example location
18. ION SIMATIC TDC T001 303300 02 00000000 TION SIMATIC TDC T001 ION VIB A TOOT 301100 02 00000000 ION VIB A T001 ION IB D T001 301100 03 00000000 ION VIB D T001 A444 ala aaa aaa aia Close Figure 25 IPE Simulation T001 with an opened Interface Profile e The opened Interface Profile can be edited now After editing the Save and Save As buttons are used in order to save the edited Interface Profile with all of its settings Try it out gt Open an existing Interface Profile gt Enter another device type and change the Profile Description within the Interface Profile Settings table gt Save the Interface Profile via the Save button The modified Interface Profile is still displayed below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Interface Profile Files branch of the DMS Explorer Ready At this point you know how to open and modify an existing Interface Profile English Release 2012 09 53 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 6 4 Starting and Stopping of Interface Profiles Open the DMS Explorer e Open the Device Management System and ensure that the DMS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Device Management System workspace Functionality e Within the DMS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Interface Pro file Files branch e Click onto any of the present Interface Profiles with t
19. Introduction SIPLUS CMS Ready At this point you know how to create a new Main Profile which can be used in order to establish the connections to one or more X Tools Servers 6 3 3 Opening of existing Main Profiles Open the MMS Explorer e Open the Main Management System and ensure that the MMS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Main Management System workspace Functionality e Within the MMS Explorer expand the Main gt Files gt Default Location gt Main Profile Files branch e Drag one of the below Main Profiles with the left mouse into the empty space at the right side of the MMS Explorer A MPE Standard T001 is opened automatically and displays the dropped Main Profile Main Profile Settings INo Parameter Value UUO 1 io tName Local Client 2 Storage Path Default Location 3 Creation Date 2010 12 17 00 00 00 Modification Date 2010 12 17 00 00 00 5 Profile Description Example Main Profile which is delivered together with X T ools a Company Name Example Company Author Name Example Author Connections No Enabled Target IP or Name Command Port DataPort UserName Password _ Password confirm Xxxx Xxxx Vv 127 0 0 1 1394 1395 Administrator Figure 22 MPE Standard T001 with an opened Main Profile e The opened Main Profile can be edited now After editing the Save and Save As buttons are used in order to save the edited Main Profile with all of its setti
20. TRG GS E neta enna AU eines dade E lee leaned ceed eed lie 176 MOME Bars cra nE cthttce itr tena Bolte cer A A thre tets ato etn ate 177 X OOIS SCIEN tac ss cise acta edge Let enee a AA eee tare eet eee 178 OVEIVIEW sir nhac telith A hci da dh canted mad tin data 178 Icon of the X TOOIS Server seisein denina ee ed tance ee bende es saniede eu DAAE banda eh ainede ev eee 178 TOOUS TD 5 tos ace ele et ae 2 te ee SO NE ae oot ee See ie at eee 178 Context Monu iraa deel S EAE ARAA ohne aera edie ae 178 X Tools Server Status Dialog eeraa EE EE A gd dead deeeateentiedilh 179 r E a tele aad E A E E A eit A aie 179 OVS RAG E R A a A A T AT 179 X OOIS SE Enana Re ee Re ee ee ie ee iin 180 OVEINIGW so araa ea e nese etctt lean tian ele iene eeepc ths leet 180 Automatic Start of the X Tools Server during the Startup of WiINdOWS ceeeeeeeeeeeee 180 Monitoring of the X Tools Server during its Runtime 0 cc eee eeeeteeee ee eene eter tneeeeetnaeeeerene 180 Stopping of the X TOOIS Service ccccccceeeeeecne cece eeeeseeeceaaeeeeeeeeeseccaeaeeeeeeeeesensisaeeeeeeeeeeeeas 180 Listof Abbreviations 242200 S aA EAEI AeA Antes aided age Anta PASEAN 181 Contact IMPOrmation iicsa 223 lt cichoscceuats EE etedums eace avin E AA 182 Release 2012 09 9 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Table of Figures Figure 1 Edition of the X Tools Server within the MMS Explorer cccccceceeeeee
21. case of a few thousands of files this operation can take several tens of seconds The actual amount of needed time is dependent to the currently used system and especially to the speed of the hard disk o The Windows Task Manager can be used in order to determine the amount of time which is needed until all files could have been created Open the Processes tab and turn on the Handles column Af ter starting of a Storage Profile one handle is being created for each offline data file when the num ber of handles stays constant the creation of files has been completed e Incase the creation of all files takes several tens of seconds also the ring buffers of all online data must be configured so that they can hold their values for at least the double amount of time In case this condi tion is not given the Storage Profile will suspend very fast because it will detect that it was unable to col lect all of the required data English Release 2012 09 142 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS e Incase of huge amounts of data the critical moment of the storing always is the moment of the file split ting Thus too little file splitting intervals would overload the system for sure and file splitting intervals be low 10 minutes do not make sense e The Allocation Size of the Storage System can not simply be set to the smallest available value in case of huge amounts of data Smaller allocation sizes l
22. must be ensured that administrator rights are granted to the Windows user who starts the Setup Start the Setup from the installation media Setup exe First it is needed to read and accept the license agreement i SIPLUS CMS4000 Setup License Agreement tej c End User License Agreement Siemens License Conditions Please note This software is protected under German and or US American Copyright Laws and provisions in international treaties Unauthorized reproduction and distribution of this software or parts of it is liable to prosecution It will be prosecuted according to criminal as well as civil law and may SS Eo See ee V PORN e ay hee By clicking I accept the terms of the License Agreement and proceeding to use the product I indicate that I have read understood and agreed to terms of the End User License Agreement Next Cancel Figure 4 Start up Dialog of the Setup with the License Agreement After accepting the license agreement the Installation Options will be displayed Available Components IV Install NET 2 0 Redistributables IV Install SIPLUS CM54000 X Tools Client IV Install SIPLUS CM54000 X Tools Server IV Run X Tools Tray Application at startup 7 Enable advanced Installation Options Target Path C Program Files SIPLUS CMS4000 Browse 7 Remember Target Path Figure 5 Installation Options i SIPLUS CMS4000 Setup Installation Options boj eee A
23. play the current settings for the currently selected user account o The access rights within the Access Rights Location Rights and Advanced Rights tables can be con figured independently for each defined user account e The Save and Save As buttons are used in order to save the configured user accounts with all of their settings Each X Tools Server supports only one User Accounts File thus the user does not need to pro vide a file name during saving o Incase the User Accounts File is being stored to the local file system any possible performed changes of the contained user accounts are not being used by the X Tools Server The User Ac counts File must be stored to an X Tools Server when its configuration shall take into effect e Incase any of the currently connected X Tools Servers is being dragged into a non empty User Ac counts Editor the user accounts of the dragged item are opened instead of the currently displayed user accounts Try it out gt Open the User Accounts Editor for any of the currently connected X Tools Servers gt Add a user account with user name Tutorial and choose any password gt Save the User Accounts File gt Change the current Main Profile so that the X Tools Client connects to the chosen X Tools Server with the username Tutorial and the assigned password Stop the Main Profile and restart it so that the made changes within the Main Profile are taken over The X Tools Client conne
24. see point 6 5 in order to see various application examples about the capabilities and usage of Storage Profiles Ready At this point you know how to create a new Storage Profile which can be used in order to store online data to the disk 6 9 3 Opening of existing Storage Profiles Open the STS Explorer e Open the Storage System and ensure that the STS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Storage System workspace Functionality e Within the STS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Storage Profile Files branch e Drag one of the below Storage Profiles with the left mouse into the empty space at the right side of the STS Explorer A Storage Profile Editor of proper type is opened automatically and displays the dropped Storage Profile English Release 2012 09 66 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 0 O nm Enabled Name Cit Bl ION Analoglnput T001 CHO1 ION Analoginput T001 CHO2 ION Analoglnput T001 CHO3 ION Analoginput T001 CHO4 ION Analoglnput T001 CHO5 ION Analoglnput T001 CHOG TION Analoglnput T001 CHO ION Analoglnput T001 CHO8 Drag drop the data which shall be stored from the MDS Explorer eae ___ _ available Currently available Currently available Currently available Currently available Currently available Currently available Currently available L L lt lt E E Save s Figure 31 SPE Binary T00
25. 6 27 Fast Analysis via the MDS Explorer ssesseeecesrresrinsssrrnssirnnedesnrneatinassttaadattnnadttnaaatinaasteeaaaaa nnne 128 6 27 1 General DESCrIPUOM ariista a hea eet tae pee a teen oe ee 128 6 27 2 Creation of a Location for Fast Analysis Scripts 0 ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeanees 128 6 27 3 Creation of a new Fast Analysis Script cccccececeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeaeeesenaaeeeseeeaees 128 6 27 4 Opening of existing Fast Analysis Scripts cc ceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseenaeeeseeaeeeeeeeaaees 129 6 27 5 Using of Fast Analysis SGripts onirin ibisi ena ERa aA a ENARA atten 130 6 28 Supported CSV csv Format for Datas resci E E E 132 6 28 1 General DESCrIPON niie iiei eenn i a a a aati teed aliens a aae 132 6 28 2 Exporting or Data OCS Y Files okerraren naa a A A A aaceeaetaceeabneat 132 6 28 3 Importing of Data from CSV Files 0 00 ec eee cece enter ee eter ee ee eeee ee eaeeeeeeeeeeesieeeeeenaeeeeneeaas 132 6 28 4 CSV File Format ton Dates cicsccice ei edie aide e a 133 6 29 File ASSOGIAU ONS ra iets cient dace tite beast aceite eae 134 6 29 1 General Description sninen minaaa a eed ee ain eae eee eee 134 6 29 2 lmportantiRacts 5 42003 etal E Mes a ee Rees on aes 134 6 29 3 Opening of Files via the Explorer of WinGOWS 2 c ccececeeeeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeeeteees 134 7 Attachment A Best Prache Sesinin tects a EA ANEA AEE ti ait AEA 136 7 1 Inside Operating
26. 8 25 Be 20 0 4 15 0 2 10 0 5 0 2 0 4 0 6 5 0 8 10 b 55 13 55 14 55 15 55 16 55 17 55 18 55 19 55 20 55 21 55 4 2012 02 15 09 55 12 mm ss 20 2 02 15 09 55 22 mm ss GMT 01 00 1 Online Data with absolute Tim6stampsl 5 09 55 22 487 000 000 GMT 01 00 124 FFT 01 FFTForSignal 114 Monitoring Chart 02 MTC Vector2D T001 1 Online Data with absolute Timestamps 2012 02 15 09 55 22 158 000 000 GMT 01 00 amp ddV2D 01 Addv2D 400 1000 800 600 600 800 1000 129 Figure 52 Example fo 6 26 6 26 1 General Description Monitoring Chart 04 MTC ynm TOOL 1 Online Data with absolute Timestamps 2012 02 15 09 55 22 100 000 000 GMT 01 00 H2D 01 H2DForSignals 515 000 r an Automatic Report Creation of Reports of Analyzing Models In this chapter you will learn how to print and save reports of Analyzing Models via the AME Standard T001 This chapter contains the following topics e Important Facts e Printing of a Report e Saving of a Report English Release 2012 09 126 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 26 2 Important Facts Reports of Analyzing Models are a pure thing of the X Tools Client The X Tools Server does not take part in the creation or handling of this kind of reports at all Each report consists out of a draft which shows the complete Analyzing Model at a zoom level of 100 and of a
27. Ana lyzing System workspace Functionality e Within the ANS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Analyzing Model Files branch e Drag one of the below Analyzing Models with the left mouse into the empty space at the right side of the ANS Explorer An Analyzing Model Editor of proper type is opened automatically and displays the dropped Analyzing Model Open Save Save s Convert Close Figure 38 AME Standard T001 with an opened Analyzing Model e The opened Analyzing Model can be edited now After editing the Save and Save As buttons are used in order to save the edited Analyzing Model with all of its settings English Release 2012 09 84 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Try it out gt Open an existing Analyzing Model gt Enter another storage location and change the Model Description within the Analyzing Model Settings ta ble Add an additional function to the Analyzing Model and output also this additional result of the calculation gt Save the Analyzing Model via the Save button The modified Analyzing Model is still displayed below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLoca tion gt Analyzing Model Files branch of the ANS Explorer Ready At this point you know how to open and modify an existing Analyzing Model 6 13 4 Starting and Stopping of Analyzing Models Open the ANS Explorer
28. Analyzing Model English Release 2012 09 100 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 15 5 Using of User Functions within Analyzing Scripts Provide some online Data e Ensure that there is some online data available within the MDS Explorer Functionality e Within the ANS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Libraries gt User Functions branch e The present User Functions can be dropped into the ASE Standard T001 e The syntax for using of User Functions is identical to the syntax of Analyzing Functions e After the Analyzing Script has been completed it can be saved and started Try it out gt Create a new empty Analyzing Script gt Drag amp Drop the User Function HelloW which has been created during the previous tutorial from the ANS Explorer into the ASE Standard T001 gt Provide two online data from the MDS Explorer as parameters for HelloVW gt Specify a data name for the return value of HelloW gt The Analyzing Script looks like in the following example Analyzing Script Settings 5 Analyzing Script Parameters EJ Offline Time Configuration J Treatment of Status Codes var maini HelloW HelloW ION AnalogInput TOO1 CHOi1 ION Analoginput TOO1 CHO2 j Line 6 Column 1 New Figure 47 ASE Standard T001 with the HelloW User Function gt Start the Analyzing Script The output data which has been co
29. Create a new Monitoring View Drag some online data from the MDS Explorer into the Monitoring View in order to visualize the data curves Pause the visualization turn the cursors on and take a look onto the displayed measurement values Continue the visualization zoom into the visualization shrink and stretch the axes scaling and use the undo redo buttons Repeat these operations in random order in order to adjust the visualization to the needs of the current application Open two additional Monitoring Charts within the Monitoring View and start to visualize data also with the two additional Monitoring Charts Save the Monitoring View At the first save the Save As dialog will pop up and offers a default file name Change the default file name to Hello Monitoring View and press OK in order to save it to the disk The new Monitoring View now is displayed below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Monitoring View Files branch of the MTS Explorer gt Take a look onto the Monitoring Views which are provided via the example location see point 6 5 in or der to see various application examples about the capabilities and usage of Monitoring Views Ready At this point you know how to create a new Monitoring View which can be used in order to visualize any of the data which is available from the MDS Explorer English Release 2012 09 62 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Intr
30. Export some offline data simple data types via the MDS Explorer gt Use a text editor in order to change an exported CSV file gt Load the modified CSV file via the ODL Standard T001 gt Compare the original offline data and the offline data from the CSV file within the Monitoring System Both data should be identical with exception of the part which has been modified within the text editor Ready At this point you know how to modify and import CSV data 6 28 4 CSV File Format for Data Simple Data Types Each CSV file has three header rows e The first row contains the name and description of the meta information of the file like the name of the data unit of the data start date stop date and the number of contained values e The second row contains the actual values of this meta information the actual name unit start date stop date and number of values of the contained data e The third row contains the name and description of the actual values within the file like the timestamp and the value Example of typical header rows e Data Name Data Unit Start Date ns Stop Date ns Number of Values My secret Data GV 1194453433688958640 1194453433688959640 2 Timestamp ns Value The format of the timestamp can be one of the following e absolute or relative time in ns since 1970 01 01 00 00 00 000 000 000 GMT o example Timestamp ns Value 1194453433688958640 2 36511230e 003 o During the import all data whi
31. Figure 14 Main Title Bar of the X TOols Client 00 cccccccccccece ee ectee ee ente ee ee enie eset te ee ee eaeeeeetaeeeeeeeneeesenneeeeenaes 37 Figure 15 Main Menu Bar of the X TOOIS Client 0 cccccccccccc ect eee ette eect tees ee tae eect eaeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeesenneeeeneaes 37 Figure 16 Main Status Bar of the X Tools Client cccccccccccettctee cette ee erent ee ee tae eset eaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeteaaeeeeneaes 38 Figure Tr Fol Seron Button oora E E dada eaen cca E E OEA toae ead dsaee as edad ne 38 Figure J 8 REStOre BUKO mri Sete d Se cneccahetn ERA REAT RAA E AREE A AI AEA EARST ESATE ARAARA 38 Foura T9 Maximize BULON eee e EAE E E R A 38 Figure 20 Close BURON irrien ts these AREN E EAEE ERTA RAEE AEEA E EARE E EASA 38 Figure 21 MPE Standard T001 with a new Main Profile ccccecccccceeecttee ee ecte eect ente ee eeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeettnaeeeeeenaes 42 Figure 22 MPE Standard T001 with an opened Main Profile ccccccccestceeeenneeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeseecaeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 43 Figure 23 X Tools Server Connectivity Gialog ccccccccccceecsccee cette ee ee ecie eset ecieee ee eeeeeeeaeeeeeeieeeetnnieeeeneaes 45 Figure 24 IPE Simulation T001 with a new Interface Profile cceccccceeeceeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeenenneeeneaas 51 Figure 25 IPE Simulation T001 with an opened Interface Profile 0 0 cccccceceeeceeeeneeeeeeenneeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 53 Figure 26 DPE ION AnalogInput
32. Offline Data Files tree displays the available offline data file locations together with all of the offline data files and directories which are present below the offline data file location e The contents of the Offline Data Files tree can be browsed for the to be loaded offline data by expanding and collapsing the displayed directories In order to load some offline data the context menu can be called above any file or directory It also is possible to select multiple files or multiple directories simulta neously and to load their information at once o The Append context menu item can be used in order to append the currently selected files directories to the already loaded parts of offline data o The Overwrite context menu item can be used in order to overwrite the already loaded parts of offline data with the currently selected files directories o The Export context menu item can be used in order to export the currently selected files directories The exported files are found in the default offline data file location o Additional information about the Advanced Append Advanced Overwrite and Advanced Export context menu items is found later in this document see point 6 10 6 e The ODL Standard T001 supports to add and to use offline file locations of different type In addition to X Tools generated offline data files sdf xts also the database files from the CMS2000 system cmsdb WAVE files wav and CSV files csv c
33. SIMATIC 57 300 SIPLUS CM54000 ION SIMATIC 57 300 SIPLUS CM54000 X Tools Multi Client SIPLUS CM54000 X Tools Advanced Analysis 3 0 SIPLUS CM54000 X Tools Standard 3 0 version Number of license keys Stand License Validity 1 Floating Count relevant Floating Count relevant 1 Floating Count relevant 1 Floating Count relevant 1 Floating Count relevant 1 Floating Count relevant 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 Floating Count relevant 1 Floating Count relevant 1 Floating Count relevant 1 Floating Count relevant 1 Floating Unlimited Unlimited 1 Floating Unlimited Unlimited 1 Floating Unlimited Unlimited Press F1 For Help 13 License key s ttt Unknown a NUM 7 Figure 3 GUI of the Automation License Manager 3 4 Order Numbers Article Order Number MLFB SIPLUS CMS X Tools Demo V 03 05 6AT8000 0AB00 0BAO SIPLUS CMS X Tools Standard V 03 05 6AT8000 0AB00 1BAO SIPLUS CMS X Tools Professional V 03 05 6AT8000 0AB00 2BA0 Further information is obtained from your local Siemens office and from the homepage http www siemens com siplus cms English Release 2012 09 22 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 4 Installation 4 1 Software Installation 4 1 1 Install X Tools and the System Documentation Note In order to run Setup and to install all of the necessary packages administrator rights are required Therefore it
34. Standard T001 e In order to remove an existing offline file location call the context menu for any of the present offline file locations within the Offline Data Files tree and choose Remove Location e After confirming of the upcoming dialog the chosen offline file location is being removed from the Offline Data Files tree Try it out gt Remove any of the present offline file locations All of the directories and files from the specified location are being removed from the Offline Data Files tree of the ODL Standard T001 Ready At this point you know how to remove offline file locations from the X Tools Server 6 12 Visualization of offline Data 6 12 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn how to visualize offline data from the MDS Explorer with the Monitoring System using the most basic functionalities This chapter contains the following topics e Visualization of offline Data English Release 2012 09 79 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 12 2 Visualization of offline Data Open the Monitoring System e Open the Monitoring System e Ensure that you have several data available below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Online Data gt All Online Data and Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Offline Data gt All Offline Data branches of the MDS Explorer At least some data names shall be available below both branches Functionality e
35. Standard or Professional up to 16 clients can be con nected simultaneously and access the Configuration Files of the X Tools Server as well as its available online and offline data See point 3 3 for a detailed overview about the different capabilities of the available editions of the X Tools Server See point 8 2 for more details about the X Tools Server 3 1 2 1 4 X Tools Tray The X Tools Tray provides the tray icon which shows basic information about the X Tools Server It allows to acces this basic information from multiple Windows sessions simultaneously See point 8 3 for more details about the X Tools Tray 3 1 2 1 5 X Tools Service The X Tools Service is not being accessed directly Its task is to monitor the X Tools Server during its opera tion in order to provide the mechanisms of the Safe Mode see point 6 18 and to start the X Tools Server in case it is configured to be started before a user logs in to Windows See point 8 4 for more details about the X Tools Service 3 1 2 2 MDS Explorer Master Data System Explorer e Provides information about all of the currently available data o Online Data o Offline Data e The MDS Explorer short name MDX is the source of all data based operations In case any data shall be used within another module of X Too s DMS MTS ANS STS or any of their sub modules the de sired data can be dragged into this module from the MDX 3 1 2 3 MMS Main Management System e Management of t
36. Systems The user interface of the X Tools Client is divided into the following six sub systems MDX Master Data System Explorer MMS Main Management System DMS Device Management System MTS Monitoring System ANS Analyzing System STS Storage System Main Title Bar The main title bar of the X Tools Client contains the following functionalities left to right Caption Show Hide Master Data System Explorer button shows hides the Master Data System Explorer Full Screen button puts the X Tools Client into full screen mode Minimize button minimizes the X Tools Client Maximize or Restore button maximizes or restores the X Tools Client Exit button closes the X Tools Client Figure 14 Main Title Bar of the X Tools Client Main Menu Bar The main menu bar of the X Tools Client contains the following functionalities left to right MDS Explorer button shows hides the Master Data System Explorer MMS button brings the Main Management System to the front in case it is opened already and opens it in case it is not opened yet DMS button brings the Device Management System to the front in case it is opened already and opens it in case it is not opened yet MTS button brings the Monitoring System to the front in case it is opened already and opens it in case it is not opened yet ANS button brings the Analyzing System to the front in case it is opened already and opens it in case it is not opened yet ST
37. Tools Service would not be stopped and the X Tools Server would be killed e g via the Task Manager it would be restarted automatically by the X Tools Service 6 19 Sequence Control 6 19 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn how to use the sequence control in order to automatically start and stop any meas urement and analysis tasks The sequence control is configured within an Analyzing Script and is being used especially for applications where the to be performed analysis tasks exceed the calculation possibilities of the used computer In such a case multiple analysis tasks can be performed after each other instead of parallel which allows more complex analysis tasks This chapter contains the following topics e Important Facts e Provided Analyzing Functions e Example 6 19 2 Important Facts In order to configure a sequence control of measurement and analysis tasks a simple Analyzing Script is being used The Analyzing Script calls Analyzing Functions in order to start and stop all of the needed Configuration Files An example use case could be Sit en niac preis Start the Device Profiles in order to connect to the A A ecos oiaro of interest e g with sample rate 1 Start the Analyzing Models Scripts of interest Perform the next analyis e g with changed sample rates or with changed calculations Start the Storage Profiles in order to store the results of the calculations Stop th
38. Within the DMS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Interface Pro file Files branch e Drag one of the below Interface Profiles with the left mouse into the empty space at the right side of the DMS Explorer An Interface Profile Editor of proper type is opened automatically and displays the dropped Interface Profile English Release 2012 09 52 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Interface Profile Settings amp Connections m No DeviceName Device Type 0 v CTN WatchGuard T001 402300 01 00000000 CTN WatchGuard T001 402300 01 00000000 02 M IFN ANALOGINPUT B01100 05 00000000 IFN ANSLOGINPUT B01100 05 00000000 fos IFN ViB ACC B01100 06 00000000 _ FNVIBACC B01100 06 00000000 LION Analoglnput T001 301100 01 00000000 LION Analoginput T001 301100 01 00000000 ION Binarylnput T001 302100 01 00000000 ION Binarylnput T001 302100 01 00000000 ION PROFIBUS DP Spy T001 303100 01 00000000 ION PROFIBUS DF Spy T001 303100 01 00000000 303300 05 00000000 303300 16 00000000 303300 04 00000000 303300 09 00000000 303300 02 00000000 301100 02 00000000 301100 03 00000000 M ON SIMOTION T001 303300 05 00000000 ION SIMOTION T001 ION SIMATIC 7 PN 303300 16 00000000 ION SIMATIC 7 PN ION SIMATIC 7 300 T001 303300 04 00000000 ION SIMATIC 7 300 T001 ION SIMATIC 7 400 T001 303300 09 00000000 ION SIMATIC 57 400 T001 M
39. a a a a ia aa a eaan aa aaa ae T a Aaaa aaa Aa TEE EA 110 Important FattS iien kinin e es tale Sot ea eta ta eh a Seat ea ott adea 110 Provided Analyzing FUNCtIONS 0 cc cccccteeeeee entree a aaa e a AE aA eea ARAA 111 E aN N EAA E AE E AE E EE N 113 Opening of Monitoring Views via the Command Line 0 cccceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeetneeeeetnneeeeetnaeeeeeee 116 General DeSCTiption EAEE A TTE TATE TEETE T 116 Commandiline yM AR oaea E eels ei AA ESANERA ER 116 Storing of Data Snapshots out of the Monitoring System eeeeeeseisseerrsseerressrerrssrrrrssrernssrees 117 General DeESCrIPUION nrs cha done edie hae Meds ciee aad aa a a aaa a aaa aaa 117 Storing Of Data Snapshot een a a a O T 117 Receiving of Data from standard OPC UA Servers ssseseisseeresesrreserrrssrrrsstttrrssttrnssrrrnssrrennt 118 General DeScriptlonian existe hess ett lant ated a caine 118 Connecting to an OPC UA Server ececcececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeseneaeeeseeaeeeseeaeees 118 Configuring of the Data of interest eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseneaaeeeseeaeeeeeeanees 119 Using ofthe Data of interest oree rekaan AE AEAEE KAEA ae nee oat 119 Providing of Data to standard OPC VA Clients 0 0 ec eeceeeee entree ee enneeeeeeenaeeeeeeiaeeeeneneeeeneaes 120 General DESCHIPUON e a aaa a E a aa aaea a ated teed ate aE aA a 120 Enabling of the built in OPC UA Server ssseeessesrnsserresterrssttrrssttnntsttrnssttnnss
40. amp Drop e In order to stop a currently running Device Profile call the context menu of this Device Profile and choose Stop o Incase the currently running Device Profile is being stopped the device stops to deliver further meas urement data to the X Tools Server e There are several conditions in which a Device Profile can not run after it has been started e g in case the target device is not available at the moment or in case the configured data names are already in use When a Device Profile can not run after it has been started it is being suspended and automatically re sumed as soon as the error condition has disappeared e Incase at least one Device Profile has been started by the user the status bar of the X Tools Client dis plays the current status of Device Profiles via the according colored icon The tool tip of this icon provides detailed information about the number of currently started and suspended Device Profiles o Note that the status bar always displays the status of exactly one X Tools Server thus also the icon for the current status of Device Profiles displays the status of only the currently chosen X Tools Server Try it out gt Start the Interface Profile Simulation T001 for the Simulation interface gt Start an existing Device Profile for the simulated ION Analoginput T001 The data which has been configured within the started Device Profile becomes available within the MDS Explorer gt Stop the curr
41. an Analyzing Script English Release 2012 09 102 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 15 6 Behavior of User Functions The following list provides information about the special requirements and functionalities of User Functions e User Functions can be protected against reading O In case a password has been specified for a User Function the User Function can not be opened within the UFE Standard T001 without entering of the proper password o The password functionality of User Functions is independent to the user account which has been used for the login to the X Tools Server o Protected User Functions are stored to disk with encryption thus the contents of protected User Func tions also can not be read outside of X Tools e Analyzing Models can be converted into User Functions and vice versa o Within the AME Standard T001 the Convert button can be pressed in order to convert the currently opened Analyzing Model into a User Function The default values for new User Functions are being used for all parameters and settings of the new User Function Within the UFE Standard T001 the Convert button can be pressed in order to convert the currently opened User Function into an Analyzing Model The default values for new Analyzing Models are be ing used for all parameters and settings of the new Analyzing Model e User Function Libraries o Each User Function which is present within
42. are written to the 1 dimensional buffer MaxBndAmp It can be chosen either to use this 1 dimensional buffer or to use single values via the Analyzing Function GetBffrM Refer to the reference manual of the Analyzing System chapter GetBffrM GetBufferMember for detailed information about this Analyzing Function English Release 2012 09 149 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Derived Spectrum In case there is a power alarm band used together with peak alarm bands it is often hard to compare the input spectrum and the alarm spectra Therefore a derived input spectrum can be used The derived spectrum is a copy of the input spectrum with the difference at the frequency range of each power band At these ranges the derived input spectrum doesn t display the peak values but the calculated signal power value in the middle of the frequency range See the following screenshot where the second alarm band was changed to a power band and the derived input spectrum is used in order to compare it more easily to the power alarm spectrum oO 1 Online Data with absolute Timestamps 2011 01 13 14 55 39 367 500 000 GMT 01 00 MondlrmSpm 01 MonAlrmSpm MondlrmSpm 01 AlrmPel2 MondlrmSpm 01 AlrmPeLt MonAlrmSpm 01 AlrmPeloO MonAlrmSpm 01 AlrmPwL2 MondlrmSpm 01 AlrmPwL1 MondlrmSpm 01 AlrmPwLO 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4
43. branch and can be accessed e g opened from there e Fora more detailed description of all available functionalities of the LPE Standard T001 refer to the ref erence manual of the Storage System chapter LPE Standard T001 Try it out gt Create a new Loading Profile gt Specify the data which shall be included during the loading gt Change the loading mode of some data so that only 1 value per second is being loaded gt Change the time configuration of some data so that only 10 seconds of the data are being loaded gt Save the Loading Profile At the first save the Save As dialog will pop up and offers a default file name Change the default file name to Hello Loading Profile and press OK in order to save it to the disk The new Loading Profile now is displayed below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Loading Profile Files branch of the STS Explorer gt Take a look onto the Loading Profiles which are provided via the example location see point 6 5 in order to see various application examples about the capabilities and usage of Loading Profiles Ready At this point you know how to create a new Loading Profile which can be used in order to load offline data from the disk English Release 2012 09 73 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 10 4 Opening of existing Loading Profiles Open the STS Explorer e Open the Storage S
44. contains all of the information which is needed in order to perform the measurement with a device This information includes in structions for the target device as well as data names normalization factors buffer sizes Multiple Device Profiles can be created for each device but only one Device Profile per device can be started at a time The started Device Profile of each device is the one whose configuration is sent to the device in order to configure it In addition the data which are defined within the started Device Profile are available to all other modules of X Tools via the MDS Explorer For each device type a specialized Device Profile Editor is provided by the X Tools Client The specialized Device Profile Editor of each device type provides all of the functionality which is needed in order to edit De vice Profiles as convenient as possible The following explanations refer to simulated devices However the handling of Device Profiles is identical be tween simulated and real devices and therefore the following operations can be applied to real devices as well Examples of Device Profiles are found within the example Configuration File location which is being delivered together with X Tools This chapter contains the following topics e Creation of a new Device Profile for an ION AnalogInput T001 e Opening of existing Device Profiles e Starting and Stopping of Device Profiles 6 7 2 Creation of a new Device Profile for an ION
45. default configuration of Analyzing Scripts typically allows executing the defined analysis without additional changes to the offline time configuration o Fora detailed description of the meaning and usage of the offline time configuration of Analyzing Scripts refer to the reference manual of the Analyzing System chapter Analyzing Script Editors e Within the Treatment of Status Codes table the handling of occurring status codes is being defined o The default configuration of Analyzing Scripts typically allows executing the defined analysis without additional changes to the treatment of status codes o Fora detailed description of the meaning and usage of the treatment of status codes of Analyzing Scripts refer to the reference manual of the Analyzing System chapter Analyzing Script Editors e In order to add input data to the Analyzing Script simply drag the desired data from the MDS Explorer into the Analyzing Script e In order to add Analyzing Functions to the Analyzing Script simply drag the desired Analyzing Function from the ANS Explorer into the Analyzing Script e In order to add User Functions to the Analyzing Script simply drag the desired User Function from the ANS Explorer into the Analyzing Script e Functions are being called in the order in which they are found in the Analyzing Script Via variables and or via nested calls the output values of each function can be provided as input values to oth
46. displays the current status of the ongoing fast analysis o The Show Log button can be used in order to open a System Log Viewer which contains all log en tries that are dependent to the running analysis o The Cancel button can be used in order to stop the running analysis and to close the Fast Analysis Status dialog e Within the MDS Explorer call the context menu from an offline data and choose any of the sub items of the Fast Analysis context menu item e The Fast Analysis Status dialog opens automatically and displays the current status of the ongoing fast analysis o The Show Log button can be used in order to open a System Log Viewer which contains all log en tries that are dependent to the running analysis o The Cancel button can be used in order to stop the running analysis and to close the Fast Analysis Status dialog e The following things must be considered for the usage of Fast Analysis Scripts o Running of a Fast Analysis Script is a temporary operation therefore Fast Analysis Scripts are not remembered for to be restarted during the next startup of the X Tools Server even when they were running at the moment of the shutdown of the X Tools Server o Iltis not possible to use the same Fast Analysing Script for more than one analysis at a time o The Fast Analysis Status dialog is shown only by the X Tools Client which has been used for the start of the analysis o Fast Analysis Script can be stopped and restart
47. files are being created and can be opened with other applications Ready At this point you know how to use the advanced mechanisms of the ODL Standard T001 in order to load offline data files which have been stored to disk previously English Release 2012 09 77 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 11 Offline File Locations 6 11 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn how offline file locations can be used in order to maintain different directories which contain the to be loaded data files of interest This chapter contains the following topics e Adding of an Offline File Location e Removing of an Offline File Location 6 11 2 Adding of an Offline File Location Open the STS Explorer e Open the Storage System and ensure that the STS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Storage System workspace Functionality e Method 1 for adding of an offline file location o Open a Storage Profile within the SPE Binary T001 o Within the Storage Profile Parameters table open the Data Storage Location combo box o Choose the entry in order to open the Add Location dialog o This method can be used in order to create offline file locations of type X Tools Offline Data Files sdf xts e Method 2 for adding of an offline file location o Open an ODL Standard T001 o Within the Offline Data Files tree open the context menu of the root item o Choose Add Location in orde
48. gt Servers gt YourServer gt Online Data gt All Online Data and Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Offline Data gt All Offline Data branches of the MDS Explorer Functionality e Method 1 for the creation of a new Analyzing Model o Within the ANS Explorer expand the Main gt Editors gt Analyzing Model Editors branch o Drag the AME Standard T001 with the left mouse into the empty space at the right side of the ANS Explorer An empty AME Standard T001 is opened automatically o Press the New button in order to create a new Analyzing Model The new Analyzing Model is dis played by the AME Standard T001 with default values o This method works in all cases even in case there is no X Tools Server connected at the moment It can be used for the creation and configuration of Analyzing Models for cases where the target X Tools Server is not present at the moment e Method 2 for the creation of a new Analyzing Model o This method works only in case the AME Standard T001 is defined as Default Editor for Functions within the Global Options Editor of the X Tools Client o Within the ANS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Libraries gt Analyzing Func tions branch o Expand also the Arithmetic branch and drag a below Analyzing Function e g the Abs Analyzing Function into the empty Analyzing System workspace An AME Standard T001 with a default Ana l
49. how to use the basic mechanisms of the sequence control Refer to the descriptions of the available Analyzing Functions and to the best practices in order to learn more about the detailed functional ities and about the most common use cases English Release 2012 09 115 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 20 Opening of Monitoring Views via the Command Line 6 20 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn how to open the X Tools Client with an additional command line parameter so that it automatically opens the specified Monitoring View This chapter contains the following topics e Command Line Syntax 6 20 2 Command Line Syntax Prepare a Monitoring View e Ensure that you have a Monitoring View with the name Open me below the Default Location of the X Tools Server e Close the X Tools Client and the X Tools Server Functionality e In order to open a Monitoring View automatically after the startup of the X Tools Client the openMVF command line parameter is provided e The syntax of openMVF is defined as follows o openMVF ServerName LocationName Path FileName e Examples for the command line parameters o openMVF YourServer Default Location Open me o openMVF YourServer Default Location SubDirectory Open me e Incase multiple Monitoring Views shall be opened multiple openMVF command line parameters with to be opened Monit
50. installa tion folder plus eventually present locations outside the installation directory before the installation of the new version In order to restore the backup of the previous version empty the installation directory first and copy your backup files into it afterwards In case there were locations outside the installation directory empty their directories also and copy the files from your backup afterwards Emptying of the target directories is important in order to be sure that no files from temporary installations or from any other operations are left and to be sure that the origi nal state of the installation is restored 4 1 3 2 New IEEE1394 Driver in V 03 03 Together with X Tools V 03 03 a new version of the IEEE1394 driver is being delivered X Tools V 03 03 is not compatible with the IEEE1394 driver of previous versions therefore the new IEEE1394 driver must be installed for all IEEE1394 devices which shall be used together with V 03 03 of X Tools The following steps must be performed in order to upgrad the driver of all SIPLUS CMS IEEE1394 devices e Close X Tools e Execute Driver Config Upgrade bat from your Drivers IEEE1394 directory and wait until the upcom ing command window outputs that the upgrade has been completed e After the upgrade has finished with success all SIPLUS CMS IEEE1394 devices will appear below the PionsysDev group within the Device Manager of windows e The upgrade is being
51. mechanisms are available for the changing of the visualization of the displayed data o When the left mouse button is being pressed zooming can be performed Press the left mouse button at an axis e g y axis t axis or x axis and move the mouse cursor in order to shrink or stretch the scaling Press the left mouse button within the curve area and move the mouse cursor in order to define the area into which it shall be zoomed lt Shift gt or lt x gt can be pressed in order to zoom only into x direction lt Ctrl gt or lt y gt can be pressed in order to zoom only into y direction o When the right mouse button is being pressed shifting can be performed Press the right mouse button at an axis e g y axis t axis or x axis and move the mouse cursor in order to move the scaling into the direction of the mouse move t axes of running online data visu alizations can not be shifted because they always display the current time at their right border In order to shift the scaling of a t axis which contains running online data the visualization must be paused via the toolbar first Press the right mouse button within the curve area and move the mouse cursor in order to move the scaling of all present axes into the direction of the mouse move lt Shift gt or lt x gt can be pressed in order to move only into x direction lt Ctrl gt or lt y gt can be pressed in order to move only into y direction t axes of running online data v
52. new installation See point 6 5 for further information about locations for Configuration Files The new version can be started now and uses all of the Configuration Files and settings from the previous installation In case the previous version is not needed any more its installation folder can be deleted Do not delete any of the directories outside the installation directory namely the locations of Configuration Files and off line data as they may be used by the new installation 4 1 3 5 Update from V 03 02 or later to V 03 05 4 1 3 5 1 Overwriting of the old Version In order to overwrite a V 03 02 or later with the new V 03 05 the following steps must be performed Create the backup of your existing installation of X Tools see point 4 1 3 1 Remove the write protection from all files of the installation directory o Call the context menu for the installation directory within the Windows Explorer and select Properties o Deselect the Read only attribute and press Apply o Inthe upcoming dialog choose Apply changes to this folder subfolders and files and press OK Start the installation of the new version of X Tools by launching of Setup exe from the installation me dia o Within the setup specify the current installation directory of X Tools as target directory for the ongoing installation After the setup has been completed the new version of X Tools has been installed over the old i
53. not guarantee that the CMOS clock is updated Therefore the CMOS time may differ from the time of the time server and may become out of synchronization This behavior may cause a time synchronization problem for the system clock after you restart the computer or after the system shuts down unexpectedly After you apply this hotfix the W32Time service synchronizes the current system clock to the CMOS clock when the W32Time service shuts down This guarantees that the time remains synchronized after the restart Please download the hotfix from Microsoft directly e http support microsoft com kb 951531 7 3 Memory Optimizations 7 3 1 General There are two main parameters which can be used in order to configure the amount of working memory RAM which is being required by X Tools Both are found within the Global Options Editor for the X Tools Server e Default Ring Buffer Size e Allocation Size In addition also loading of offline data can require a significant amount of working memory 7 3 2 Default Ring Buffer Size The Default Ring Buffer Sizes specifies the amount of values which are being kept in the working memory for each online data The amount of bytes within the working memory which are needed in order to acquire a given number of data with a given ring buffer size is roughly calculated as follows e AmountOfMemory bytes NumberOfData 1 RingBufferSize Values SizeOfOneValue bytes e SizeOfOneValue is dependent to the
54. of the dialog English Release 2012 09 177 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 8 2 X Tools Server 8 2 1 Overview The X Tools Server does not provide its own user interface Instead only an icon is displayed within the task bar of Windows This icon provides a tool tip and a context menu which can be called in order to receive the most basic information about the X Tools Server and to configure the most basic settings All further configurations are being performed via the X Tools Client See point 6 3 for detailed information about how to connect one or multiple X Tools Clients to the X Tools Server 8 2 2 Icon of the X Tools Server The icon of the X Tools Server provides basic information about the current status of the X Tools Server The following status information can be provided via this icon Icon Description H startup The X Tools Server is starting up Py normal operation The X Tools Server is running normally or shutting down ZA safe mode The X Tools Server is running in safe mode a error The X Tools Server has detected a severe error during its startup Safe Mode Detailed information about the safe mode of the X Tools Server is found within the tutorial see point 6 18 Error In case a severe error has been detected during the startup more detailed information is provided via the tool tip of the icon and via the X Tools Server Status d
55. patent grant or registration of a utility model or design are reserved Disclaimer of Liability We have checked the contents of this document for agreement with the hardware and software described Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely we cannot guarantee full agreement However the data in the manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary cor rections will be included in subsequent editions Suggestions for improvement are welcomed Siemens AG Industry Sector P O Box 4848 90327 Nuremberg Siemens AG 2012 Germany Technical data subject to change English Release 2012 09 2 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Table of Contents 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 2 2 1 2 2 3 3 1 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 3 1 2 1 1 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 1 3 3 1 2 1 4 3 1 2 1 5 3 1 2 2 3 1 2 3 3 1 2 4 3 1 2 5 3 1 2 6 3 1 2 7 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 1 3 4 1 3 1 4 1 3 2 4 1 3 3 4 1 3 4 4 1 3 4 1 4 1 3 5 English PROTACE 7ye ani Regie te EAA AAEE Hoye ste epee ic eteei ewe T TEANA ONERE mene ened 12 Purpose of this DOCUMENT scsi meone iaa aa a aa e aaa aaa elaia naa iaae aaoi 12 Validity of this Documents e erener iarianiana iinan in eana eee ld ela eid edie aaae SAn EATA 12 PUGNE arar a A A EA T O T TE T ad tite 12 NOLALONS ornan aaa a a ered pee N 13 SCope ODSEV iaaa E dee ee 14 Scope of DELIVELY cose eriein eei ai aaiae raia eE ANE EERTE ata EEDAN EA ER Eei Aa
56. performed only for the IEEE1394 devices which are currently attached to the PC A manual installation of the new IEEE1394 driver may be necessary for all IEEE1394 devices which are be ing attached to the PC after the upgrade e While the upgrade is in progress the hardware assistant of Windows may pop up for each device Typi cally it disappears automatically after a few moments while the upgrade is in progress Depending to the configuration of the operating system it can happen that the automatic installation of the device driver must be chosen within the hardware assistant in order to continue the installation Once the new IEEE1394 driver has been installed for a device the device can not be used with versions of X Tools before V 03 03 any more In order to use the device with versions of X Tools before V 03 03 again the device driver must be set back to the old driver The following steps must be performed in order to downgrade the IEEE1394 driver of all SIPLUS CMS IEEE1394 devices e Close X Tools e Execute Driver Config Downgrade bat from your Drivers lIEEE1394 directory and wait until the up coming command window outputs that the downgrade has been completed e After the downgrade has finished with success all SIPLUS CMS IEEE1394 devices will appear below the SIPLUS CMS group within the Device Manager of windows English Release 2012 09 28 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLU
57. provides it to the following Analyzing Functions InOrdRsmpl e this Analyzing Function performs the main part of the order analysis e the vibration signal is defined by the name which is written at argument Signal e the trigger signal is connected to the Trigger argument e the argument Nol defines how many impulses the trigger signal generates per revolution e the argument MaxOrder defines the maximum order which is displayed in the order spectrum FFT e transforms the order re sampled 1 dimensional buffer from the time domain into the order domain OutSpm e writes the calculated spectrum data to the system English Release 2012 09 151 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 7 4 3 3 Example A concrete example is provided in order to show a real life application The hereby used Analyzing Model File similar to the above screenshot see Files Example Location Analyzing Model Files Input InOrdRsmpl 02 can be found within the example location which is being delivered together with X Tools In addition also the used offline data Trigger and Vibration must be loaded from the offline data location which is being delivered together with X Tools Input Signals There are two needed input signals the vibration signal and the according trigger signal In the hereby given example the vibration signal consists out of two added sine waves The first sine has a fre quen
58. steps see also point 7 4 6 1 Monitoring Chart 03 MTC yt TOO 35 24 Spectrum Envelope ControlUpper SS a Spectrum Envelope Control J Spectrum Envelope ControlLower 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OH OKRNHYaUDIMHGO T 00 26 10 2 2011 12 21 14 25 59 mmiss 6 40 26 50 2011 12 21 14 26 59 mm ss GMT 01 00 Figure 75 Example of the Output of MonitorSpectrumEnvelope English Release 2012 09 165 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 7 4 6 6 Summary The following Configuration Files are being used by this chapter Analyzing Models found in Analyzing Model Files Measurement Tasks Spectrum Envelopes Name Description This Analyzing Model can be used in order to create the reference spectrum without er rors It is typically not needed because the data from this Analyzing Model is available as example offline data 10 Create Reference Spectrum This Analyzing Model creates all spectrum envelopes ouf of the previously loaded spec 20 Create Spectrum Envelope trum data This Analyzing Model simulates an online spectrum with small errors so that violations of 30 Simulate Spectrum with Errors the calculated envelopes take place 40 Monitor Spectrum Envelope This Analyzing Model monitors the online spectrum against the created spectrum enve lop
59. the context menu from an offline data category or from an offlne data o Choose Export or Advanced Export from the context menu in order to start the export operation e The exported CSV file is put into the chosen last used offline file location of type CSV Files csv e All types of offline data simple data types 1 dimensional buffers 2 dimensional buffers spectrums can be exported to CSV files Try it out gt Export some offline data files simple data types and extended data types via the ODL Standard T001 gt Export some offline data simple data types and extended data types via the MDS Explorer Ready At this point you know how to export CSV data 6 28 3 Importing of Data from CSV Files Open the ODL Standard T001 e Open the Storage System and ensure that the ODL Standard T001 is displayed within the Storage System workspace The ODL Standard T001 must contain at least one offline file location of type CSV Files csv Functionality e Within the ODL Standard T001 call the context menu from a directory or file below an offline file location of type CSV Files csv e Choose Append Overwrite Advanced Append or Advanced Overwrite from the context menu in order to start the import operation e Currently only simple data types can be imported from CSV files English Release 2012 09 132 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Try it out gt
60. the currently available online and or offline data English Release 2012 09 131 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 28 Supported CSV csv Format for Data 6 28 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn about the details of the file format which is being used for exporting and importing of CSV csv data files This chapter contains the following topics e Exporting of Data to CSV Files e Importing of Data from CSV Files e CSV File Format for Data 6 28 2 Exporting of Data to CSV Files Open the ODL Standard T001 e Open the Storage System and ensure that the ODL Standard T001 is displayed within the Storage System workspace The ODL Standard T001 must contain at least one offline file location of type X Tools Offline Data Files sdf xts and at least one offline file location of type CSV Files csv e Ensure that you have several data available below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Offline Data gt All Offline Data branch of the MDS Explorer Functionality e Method 1 for exporting of data to CSV files o Within the ODL Standard T0071 call the context menu from a directory or file below an offline file loca tion of type X Tools Offline Data Files sdf xts o Choose Export or Advanced Export from the context menu in order to start the export operation e Method 2 for exporting of data to CSV files o Within the MDS Explorer call
61. the only needed configuration for the communication with OPC UA clients is to enable the OPC UA server functionality of X Tools English Release 2012 09 33 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction 4 2 8 Video Card Driver SIPLUS CMS It is highly recommended to ensure that the used video card driver is up to date in order to achieve the best possible performance for the visualization of data within the Monitoring System As the Monitoring System allows choosing between DirectX and OpenGL renderers for the visualization a good support of the chosen renderer DirectX or OpenGL is highly recommended for fluent visualization results 4 2 9 Minimal Firmware Versions The following minimal firmware versions must be provided by each device Device Minimal CMM Main Version Minimal IOM IFM Version IFN ANALOGINPUT V 01 12 EN 0000 V 01 02 EN 0004 IFN VIB ACC V 01 12 EN 0000 V 01 03 EN 0018 ION SIMATIC S7 PN V 01 01 EN 0000 n a ION SIMATIC S7 300 T001 V 03 01 EN 0000 n a ION SIMATIC S7 400 T001 V 03 06 EN 0000 n a ION SIMATIC TDC T001 V 03 02 EN 0002 n a ION SIMOTION T001 V 01 02 EN 0000 n a ION AnalogInput T001 V 03 00 EN 0010 V 08 00 EN 0000 ION Binarylnput T001 V 03 00 EN 0010 V 02 00 EN 0001 ION PROFIBUS DP Spy T001 V 03 00 EN 0010 n a ION VIB A T001 V 03 00 EN 0010 V 04 00 EN 0000 ION VIB D T001 V 03 00 EN 0010 V 04 00 EN 0000 CTN Wa
62. this service and therefore to start the X Tools Server open the properties of X Tools Service go to the Log On tab select Log on as this account and English Release 2012 09 44 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS specify the Windows user and password which shall be used to run the service The chosen user must have write access within the directories of the X Tools Server 6 3 6 X Tools Server Connectivity Dialog The X Tools Server Connectivity dialog can be called from the context menu of the X Tools Server which is available from the task bar of Windows This dialog can be used in order to check and to edit the communication ports which are being used by the X Tools Server In some environments it may happen that the communica tion ports which are requested by the X Tools Server are being occupied by another application already In this case the X Tools Server Connectivity dialog can be used in order to change the communication ports of the X Tools Server After the communication ports of the X Tools Server have been changed via the X Tools Server Connectivity dialog the X Tools Server must be re initialized or re started In case the communication ports of the X Tools Server are being changed also the Main Profiles of all X Tools Clients which need to connect to the X Tools Server must be updated so that they point to the new communi cation ports X Tools Server Connectivity Co
63. time client it is only necessary to change some registry entries and to restart the Windows time service afterwards The following table contains the registry keys which must be updated in order to setup up the time client The registry keys are found below HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services W32Time Release 2012 09 Registry Key New Value Config FrequencyCorrectRate 4 Config LargePhaseOffset 1280000 Config HoldPeriod 5 Config MaxAllowedPhase Offset 300 Config PhaseCorrectRate 7 Config SpikeWatchPeriod 90 Config Updatelnterval 30000 Parameters NtpServer YourNTPServerName 0x1 Parameters Type NTP TimeProviders NtpClient Enabled 1 TimeProviders NtpClient InputProvider 1 TimeProviders NtpClient SpecialPolllnterval 60 138 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS The above values are examples which may be acceptable for a large range of applications In case more spe cific settings are needed detailed information about the exact meaning of each registry key is found within the documentation about the windows time service which is available directly from Microsoft After the values of the Windows time service have been changed within the registry the Windows time service can be restarted via the following command line e net stop w32time amp amp net start w32time It is suggested to manually synchronize the system time to th
64. tray icon of the X Tools Tray is hidden At operating systems which allow multiple Windows session to be present simultaneously e g Microsoft Win dows Server 2003 but with restrictions also Microsoft Windows XP and Microsoft Windows 7 one instance of the X Tools Tray can be started in each Windows session This approach allows to monitor and control the one and only X Tools Server from any of the present Windows sessions The X Tools Tray application also can be started manually However typically this is not needed and it is not possible to run multiple instances of the X Tools Tray within one Windows session simultaneously English Release 2012 09 179 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 8 4 X Tools Service 8 4 1 Overview The X Tools Service can be used for the following tasks e automatic start of the X Tools Server during the startup of Windows e monitoring of the X Tools Server during its runtime 8 4 2 Automatic Start of the X Tools Server during the Startup of Windows The X Tools Service can start the X Tools Server during the startup of Windows In order to enable this func tionality the Automated Startup option from the global options of the X Tools Server must be configured to Start the X Tools Server before a user logs in to Windows Enabling of this option installs the X Tools Service which becomes visible within the Services dialog of Win dows then 8 4 3 Monitoring of
65. used in order to change the value of the according data of the OPC UA server instantly no matter whether any Device Profile is currently running or not e Save the new Device Profile e Start the new Device Profile o All of the data which is present and enabled within the Device Profile Input Data table becomes pre sent within the MDS Explorer as online data e Fora more detailed description of all available functionalities of the DPE OPC UA T001 refer to the ref erence manual of the Device Management System chapter DPE OPC UA T001 Try it out gt Create a new Device Profile in order to receive the data from the existing OPC UA server gt Start the new Device Profile The configured online data becomes present within the MDS Explorer Ready At this point you know how to receive online data from standard OPC UA servers 6 22 4 Using of the Data of interest Functionality e The online data which is received from an OPC UA server can be visualized like any other online data within the system e The online data also can be used within the Analyzing System and the Storage System of X Tools like any other online data English Release 2012 09 119 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Try it out gt Visualize the data from the OPC UA server within the Monitoring System gt Perform simple calculations on base of the online data from the OPC UA server gt Store some of the onlin
66. 1 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Alarm Spectrum The following screenshot shows the input spectrum together with the alarm spectra Within the given example the second peak exceeds the first alarm level of the second band m mja 1 Online Data with absolute Timestamps 2011 01 13 14 53 00 135 500 000 GMT 01 00 MonAlrmSpm 01 MonAlrmSpm gt a Mon lrmSpm 01 AlrmPeL2 Mon lrmS5pm 01 AlrmPeLt Mon lrmS5pm 01 AlrmPelo Figure 59 Example of the Input Spectrum with Alarm Spectra Alarm Detection There are two ways the monitored alarm can be detected The first way is an entry within the System Log IE Log Entries No Date andTime a Entry O6 2010 01 13 18 18 09 Program will be executed OF 2010 01 13 18 18 09 Executing of program 08 2010 01 13 18 18 10 Mon4lmmSpm Peak alarm band number 2 exceeded level 0 with amplitude 26 87 at frequency 250 49 Figure 60 Example of an Alarm Log Entry The second way is to detect it via the control signal from the output argument Cnitrl This signal is an integer value between 0 and 3 where e Omeans no alarm e 1 means alarm level 0 exceeded e 2 means alarm level 1 exceeded e 3means alarm level 2 exceeded Band Maxima As mentioned before there is also a way to get the maxima of each band e g for trend analysis Every time a spectrum is being monitored the according maxima base band and each alarm band
67. 1 with a new Analyzing Model ccccccccecceceenneeeeeenneeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeneeeeneaas 82 Figure 38 AME Standard T001 with an opened Analyzing MOE ccccccceececeeneeeeeeenneeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeneaas 84 Figure 39 ASE Standard T001 with a new Analyzing Script cccccccccceteeeenneeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeseeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 88 Figure 40 ASE Standard T001 with an opened Analyzing SCLipt ccccccccccsceeeenieeeeeeneeeeseecueeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeseaas 90 English Release 2012 09 10 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 English UFE Standard T001 with a new User Function cccccccccccceteceeeenneeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeseeneeeeennaees 94 UFE Standard T001 with the HellOW Example ccccccccceecee ene eeeeecee ee eeeneeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeseenieeeeennaees 96 UFE Standard T001 with the HellOW2 Example ccccccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeetenaeeeteeaaees 97 UFE Standard T001 with an op
68. 1 with an opened Storage Profile e The opened Storage Profile can be edited now After editing the Save and Save As buttons are used in order to save the edited Storage Profile with all of its settings Try it out gt Open an existing Storage Profile gt Enter another storage location and change the Profile Description within the Storage Profile Settings ta ble gt Save the Storage Profile via the Save button The modified Storage Profile is still displayed below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Storage Profile Files branch of the STS Explorer Ready At this point you know how to open and modify an existing Storage Profile English Release 2012 09 67 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 9 4 Starting and Stopping of Storage Profiles Open the STS Explorer e Open the Storage System and ensure that the STS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Storage System workspace e Ensure that you have several data available below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Online Data gt All Online Data branch of the MDS Explorer Functionality e Within the STS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Storage Profile Files branch e Click onto any of the present Storage Profiles with the right mouse button in order to open the context menu e In order to start the currently select
69. 14 Unpacking and Ghecking aeniea R EEA A EATEN 14 Product Characteristics aa aN AEAEE A T E 15 IN ODUCHON D PEP E I E ei E EE eee ele ein E aed 15 WhatisSIPLUS CMS aaa ea aa e aa a as EEEa 15 Software Structure hjeeeh bie ein alii chee hill an eid AEEA A NEE TROE A 15 GGOMCK E E EA T E T E E A E 15 EXxe Cutables anra aaa a iee a i see tear teen ete es 15 Pae CHEM PEETA EE T E E E E E E en eee NA 15 X Tools Serve e rinnan accede a Eeg Aae ideii baie EEEa aa deb aret i e Eiaeai 16 KLOOIS Lay r E E E TAA 16 X TOONS SEMVICE E A A E E E E E E TT 16 MDS Explorer Master Data System Explorer 0 cccccceceecceeceeeeeeeeeeceeaeteceeeeeeseesnanees 16 MMS Main Management System ssesseeeeseeeeneeeirssterrstrtrrsstinnssttrnssttnnsstinnnnnttnnnstennnnenn 16 DMS Device Management System eessseseisesesrresrtrresttrrssttrnstttnnsstttnnsstennssttnunsennnnneena 17 MIS MOnItOring Syste liaa ar edz cshacedecepatcecein tags ceantcedeennatsegesetlagecdaagece A aad 17 ANS Analyzing System aanere ora debe AA ARE didi pe esc Aei 17 S1S Storage System s a E E ES E die ee 18 Hard and Software Requirement ccccccccsecceceeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeesescaeaeeeeeeeseseeneeeeeeeeeeeetensaees 19 Hardware S E T A E ee a aa 19 SOWIE ai S dela aes Mette Ste lee eae ee rete 19 License Management 2s cccseed eset dette a ctbtet lente tek ba eda acct adda tect EEA 20 Order NOMbEMS saccente noerdin toein aea iio steve adev eg
70. 4 bus system and can be connected to any PC lap top or server with an IEEE1394 interface Despite the considerable features of the system an experienced technician with no prior knowledge about SIPLUS CMS can carry out measurements within a very short period of time Simple measurement tasks such as paperless recording of plant signals or fault recording are quickly and effectively carried out For higher sophisticated measurements such as remote service amp maintenance or condition monitoring a high level of graphical configuration and parameterization is possible within SIPLUS CMS In addition the powerful trigger machine and the analyzing engine enable the user to perform more extensive measurement tasks The following topics provide a short overview about the functionalities of the main parts of the SIPLUS CMS software 3 1 2 Software Structure 3 1 2 1 General 3 1 2 1 1 Executables X Tools is a client server application which consists out of four executables e X Tools Client exe e X Tools Server exe e X Tools Tray exe e X Tools Service exe The client and the server communicate with each other via standard mechanisms of TCP IP thus they can be running either on the same computer or on any two computers which are connected via TCP IP In the default configuration it is not necessary to deal with the details of the client server architecture at all Instead it is enough to start the X Tools Client in which case the X Tool
71. 60 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 7 4 5 5 Example The offline data Analyzing Models and Analyzing Scripts from the example locations which are delivered to gether with X Tools can be used in order to reproduce the above steps see also point 7 4 5 1 Monitoring Chart 03 MTC yt T001 35 24 X Envelope ControlUpper 1 xy Envelope Control S J XY Envelope ControlLower 2 3 44 5 1S a 6 4 8 9 4 10 11 1 1 P T T T T 10 20 10 30 11 00 11 10 2011 12 21 14 10 16 mm ss G1 2011 12 21 14 11 16 mm ss GMT 01 00 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OYHKOKenwauarnawo Figure 69 Example of the Output of MonitorxXYEnvelope 7 4 5 6 Summary The following Configuration Files are being used by this chapter Analyzing Models found in Analyzing Model Files Measurement Tasks XY Envelopes Name Description 10 Create Reference x and y Data This Analyzing Model can be used in order to create the reference x and y data without errors It is typically not needed because the data from this Analyzing Model is available as example offline data 40 Simulate x and y Data with Errors This Analyzing Model simulates online x and y data with small errors so that violations of the calculated envelopes take place 50 Monitor XY Envelope This Analyzing Model
72. According export files are being created and can be opened with other applications Ready At this point you know how to use the simple mechanisms of the ODL Standard T001 in order to load offline data files which have been stored to disk previously 6 10 3 Creation of a new Loading Profile Open the STS Explorer e Open the Storage System and ensure that the STS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Storage System workspace e Ensure that you have several data available below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Online Data gt All Online Data branch of the MDS Explorer Functionality e Method 1 for the creation of a new Loading Profile o Within the STS Explorer expand the Main gt Editors gt Loading Profile Editors branch o Drag the LPE Standard T001 with the left mouse into the empty space at the right side of the STS Explorer An empty LPE Standard T001 is opened automatically o Press the New button in order to create a new Loading Profile The new Loading Profile is displayed by the LPE Standard T001 with default values o This method works in all cases even in case there is no X Tools Server connected at the moment It can be used for the creation and configuration of Loading Profiles for cases where the target X Tools Server is not present at the moment English Release 2012 09 71 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS e The following screenshot shows an exam
73. Address Siemens AG IA CE SE Wuerzburger Strasse 121 90766 Fuerth Germany Internet http www siemens com siplus cms English Release 2012 09 182 182
74. AnalogInput T001 Open the DMS Explorer e Open the Device Management System and ensure that the DMS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Device Management System workspace e Ensure that you have at least one ION Analoginput T001 simulated below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Interfaces gt Simulation T001 branch of the DMS Explorer Functionality e Method 1 for the creation of a new Device Profile o Within the DMS Explorer expand the Main gt Editors gt Device Profile Editors branch o Drag the DPE ION Analoginput T001 with the left mouse into the empty space at the right side of the DMS Explorer An empty DPE ION AnalogInput T001 is opened automatically o Press the New button in order to create a new Device Profile The new Device Profile is displayed by the DPE ION AnalogInput T001 with default values o The new Device Profile must be told for which target device is shall be used In order to specify a tar get device either enter the name of the target device into the Target Device Name cell of the Device Profile Settings table or Drag amp Drop the desired target device from the DMS Explorer onto the Target Device Name cell o This method works in all cases even in case there is no X Tools Server connected at the moment and or in case the desired target device is not available at the moment It can be used for the creation and configuration of Device Profiles for cases where the target X Too
75. CHOG Decimal32 x0 yO x1 x0 0 000 y0 0 000 x1 1 000 y1 1 000 Each Value CHO Decimal32 x0 y0 x1 x0 0 000 y0 0 000 x1 1 000 y1 1 000 Each Value CHOS Decimal32 x0 yO x1 x0 0 000 y0 0 000 x1 1 000 y1 1 000 Each Value gt Vv Vv Vv Vv v Vv Vv 1 CHO1 Sample Time s CHO2 Sample Time s CHO3 Sample Time s CHO4 Sample Time s 5 CHOS Sample Time s 6 CHOG Sample Time s CHO Sample Time s CHO8 Sample Time s Save As Figure 26 DPE ION AnalogInput T001 with a new Device Profile e The Device Profile Settings table at the top of the DPE ION AnalogInput T001 displays the general file information and allows entering additional file attributes like a description and the name of the author of the file and his company In addition Device Profile related settings like the target device name the data name prefix or the data supervision time are configured via the Device Profile Settings table e Within the Device Profile Data table the 8 input channels of the ION Analoginput T001 can be configured There all of the information about each channel is being defined like the data name the data description the normalization the buffer size or the record mode e Within the Device Profile Filters table the filter coefficients of all 8 input channels can be configured e Within the Device Profile Parameters table the sample rates of all 8 input channels can be configured e Th
76. CMS Ready At this point you know how to add Configuration File locations to the X Tools Server 6 5 3 Removing of a Configuration File Location Open the DMS Explorer e Open the Device Management System and ensure that the DMS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Device Management System workspace Functionality e Expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Files branch of the DMS Explorer e In order to remove an existing Configuration File location call the context menu for any of the present Configuration File locations within the DMS Explorer and choose Remove Location e After confirming of the upcoming dialog the chosen Configuration File location is being removed from all explorer trees of the X Tools Server The Configuration Files below the removed Configuration File loca tion are being stopped by this operation e In addition to the Remove Location context menu item also Delete Location is available Where Remove Location only removes the specified Configuration File location from the knowledge of the X Tools Server Delete Location actually deletes all of the files of the location from the disk Try it out gt Remove any of the present Configuration File locations All of the Configuration Files from the specified location are being removed from the explorer trees of the X Tools Server All of the Configuration Files from the removed Configuration File location are being stopped Ready At t
77. Ex plorer and choose Add Location e Within the upcoming Add Location dialog choose any symbolic name for your new Fast Analysis loca tion and specify the path to this location at the disk In addition change the value of Location Type to Fast Analysis e Press OK in order to add the specified location to the X Tools Server e After another Fast Analysis location has been added successfully the X Tools Server automatically cre ates all of the necessary sub directories o Locations of type Fast Analysis do not support any Configuration Files except Analyzing Scripts Therefore locations of this type are visible only within the ANS Explorer and do not contain any sub items except Analyzing Script Files o Only one location of type Fast Analysis can be added to the X Tools Server at any time Try it out gt Add the SIPLUS CMS x Tools Server User Fast Analysis Location directory as Fast Analysis location All of the Analyzing Scripts from the location become visible within the ANS Explorer of the X Tools Server Ready At this point you know how to add a Fast Analysis location to the X Tools Server 6 27 3 Creation of a new Fast Analysis Script Open the ANS Explorer e Open the Analyzing System and ensure that the ANS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Stor age System workspace e Ensure that you have several data available below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Onli
78. Figure 61 Example of the derived Input Spectrum with Alarm Spectra 7 4 3 Order Analysis 7 4 3 1 General This chapter shows how to use the Analyzing System in order to analyze data via an order analysis The order analysis is used mainly in order to monitor rotating machinery with variable speed For the calculation of an order spectrum the vibration signal has to be changed from time equidistant to angle equidistant Therefore it is necessary to measure the speed via impulses of a trigger additionally to the vibra tion In an additional step the vibration signal has to be re sampled depending to the speed After this order re sampling the normal FFT algorithm can be applied 7 4 3 2 Analyzing Model The main part for the order analysis is done by the Analyzing Function InputOrderResampling Within this Ana lyzing Function the vibration and trigger signal is defined together with some other configuration parameters English Release 2012 09 150 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS The following screenshot shows an example of an Analyzing Model for the calculation of an order spectrum Analyzing Model Parameters J Treatment of Status Codes Deci mal64 Default 0 000 Interval 1000000000 Absolute Size 50 true Open Save Sa Convert Close Figure 62 Example of an Analyzing Model for the Order Analysis In e reads the signal from the system and
79. HTML document which lists all of the information about the Analyzing Model and all of its contained Analyzing and User Functions Each saved report is stored to the following location e X Tools Client User Reports The file names of each saved report contain the following parts e name of the Analyzing Model e timestamp at which the report has been created Example e My Analyzing Model 2011 12 05 10 07 00 000 000 000 png e My Analyzing Model 2011 12 05 10 07 00 000 000 000 htm 6 26 3 Printing of a Report Open an Analyzing Model e Open an Analyzing Model which contains multiple Analyzing and or User Functions Functionality e Reports can be sent to any of the currently available printers via the Print Report context menu item within the Action Area of the AME Standard T001 Try it out gt Put multiple Analyzing and or User Functions into an AME Standard T001 gt Print a report of the current Analyzing Model The standard printer dialog of Windows pops up and allows to choose the printer The printed document contains all information about the Analyzing Model and its contained Analyzing and or User Functions as well as a draft of the complete Analyzing Model Ready At this point you know how to print reports of Analyzing Models 6 26 4 Saving of a Report Open an Analyzing Model e Open an Analyzing Model which contains multiple Analyzing and or User Functions Functionality e Reports can be saved to file via the S
80. IPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 7 4 2 Spectrum Monitoring 7 4 2 1 General This chapter shows how to automate the monitoring of a frequency spectrum with a defined alarm spectrum In case certain frequencies have to be monitored e g gear tooth frequencies it is possible to set alarm levels at defined frequencies 7 4 2 2 Analyzing Model The following screenshot shows an example of an Analyzing Model which monitors a frequency spectrum Figure 57 Example of an Analyzing Model which monitors a Frequency Spectrum e reads the signal from the system and provides it to the following Analyzing Functions e creates an 1 dimensional buffer with defined size NoP must be 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 or 65536 e transforms the 1 dimensional buffer from the time domain into the frequency domain English Release 2012 09 147 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS GenAlrmBnd e generates an alarm band e each alarm band is defined by its centre width and the amplitudes of the alarm levels e at the argument Mode it can be chosen if the alarm band is monitoring peak values or signal power values MonAlrmSpm e generates alarm spectra defined by the connected alarm bands and the base levels and monitors the connected spectrum e output argument Cnit
81. IPLUS CMS X Tools Professional V 03 05 During the following pages these software packages will be referred to by the term X Tools 1 3 Audience This document is intended for personnel involved in the commissioning and using of the software e X Tools English Release 2012 09 12 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 1 4 The fo English Notations lowing notations are used within this document bold italic text is being used for the main executables of X Tools o examples X Tools Client X Tools Server bold text is being used for the software modules of X Tools o examples Main Management System Device Profile Editor IPE Socket T001 green text is being used for controls like tables and trees o examples Main Profile Settings table Device Profile Data table orange text is being used for simple controls like a menu button a single row column cell of a table or a branch of a tree o examples Open menu button IP Address column Target Device Name cell Interfaces Branch dark yellow text is being used for the entries of context menus o examples Advanced Append Edit Camel Notation is being used for major terms of X Tools o examples Main Profile Interface Profile User Accounts File Analyzing Function lt and gt brackets are being used for keyboard keys o examples lt Ctrl gt lt Alt gt lt Shift gt lt Del gt and brackets are being used for mouse operations
82. Installation ieee aie ene ee a ee dees ia ed ade aeteeen cbetveniee 31 4 2 1 How to connect SIPLUS CMS to your Application 0 0 cccccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeees 31 4 2 2 Communication IMtermaces esaeraren Ral ee eye eset Ail ee enti eed 31 4 2 3 How to connect IEEE1394 Devices to the PC ec eeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeenneeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeetiaeeeeneaaes 32 4 2 4 How to connect Ethernet IONS to the PC serai erae Ea a aR E E EEA 32 4 2 5 How to connect USB CTNs to the PC ssssssssesissssrrssserrssttrrssttrrssttnnssttnrsstinnssttnnsssennsnten 33 4 2 6 How to connect OPC UA Servers to the PC ssssssessissssrsseerrsserrrsstitrrssttrnssttnnssttrnssternssreennt 33 4 2 7 How to connect OPC UA Clients to the PC ee eeceeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeenneeeeeeaaeeeeetiaeeeeeeneeeeeeaes 33 4 2 8 Video Gard Drivers vincne cides anes dedrttn a en iat ei eget 34 4 2 9 Minimal Firmware Versions 00 cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesenieeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeenaes 34 5 Quick Reference semeri ree ia ton a ees ee eee ee 35 6 Totora aaa ae een ae a aaa nda Mi eee eee ae 36 6 1 General Description Iassi eene stoner ete ae Aeon een aed 36 6 2 A TOONS BASICS ir a E cob addcwes ted E teks sadewes ebhaatiend E EEA 36 6 2 1 General Description niee hoieri ea eai hi late ee 36 6 2 2 Running X Tools for the first Time ce eececeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeesesaeeeeescaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 36 6 2 3 xX Tools User Interface o
83. MDS Explorer expand Main Servers YourServerName right click with the mouse onto Offline Data choose Load Offline Data in order to open the Offline Data Loader within the Offline Data Loader browse the to desired offline data files and choose the Append or Overwrite context menu items in order to load offline data from the disk After an offline data has been loaded it appears within the MDS Explorer below Main Servers YourServerName Offline Data All Offline Data From there the offline data can be used within all other systems of X Tools Visualize the currently availabe offline data open the MTS Monitoring System drag any offline data from the MDS Explorer into the free space of the opened window Anew Monitoring View is being opened automatically and the dropped data is being visualized Additional data can be dropped into the same and or into additional Monitoring Views Analyzing of data via Analyzing Models equal for Analyzing Scripts gt a open the ANS Analyzing System within the ANS Explorer expand Main Servers YourServerName Files Default Location right click with the mouse onto Analyzing Model Files choose New Analyzing Model in order to open the Analyzing Model Editor configure the desired calculations press Save within the Analyzing Model Editor within the ANS Explorer expand Main Se
84. MS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS e The following screenshot shows an example of an opened ODL Standard T001 Offline File Locations CMS 2000 Date Structure Offline Data Files S A YOURSERVER Offline Files Offline Files CS 8 Example Offline Files sdf xts Sg ION Analoglnput T0017 Sty 20090604 Beefy 122306 ION Analoglnput T001 CHO1 ION Analoglnput T001 CHO2 ION Analoglnput T001 CHO3 ION Analoginput T001 CHO4 5 ION Snaloglnput T001 CHO5 ION Analoglnput T001 CHO6 ION Analoglnput T001 CHO ION Analoglnput T001 CHOS fg ION Binarylnput T001 Sy Order Analysis fy Rectangle G Log Entries Apply Cancel Loading Figure 36 ODL Standard T001 with some Offline Data Files e The Offline File Locations table at the top of the ODL Standard T001 displays the symbolic names and absolute paths of the available offline data file locations e The Offline Data Files tree displays the available offline data file locations together with all of the offline data files and directories which are present below the offline data file location e The contents of the Offline Data Files tree can be browsed for the to be loaded offline data by expanding and collapsing the displayed directories In order to load some offline data the context menu can be called above any file or directory It also is possible to select multiple files or multiple directories simulta neously and to load thei
85. Model an Ana lyzing Script or a Storage Profile e the Pause 01 Analyzing Script within the example location shows another example about how to use this Analyzing Function Continue e allows to continue a Configuration File an Interface Profile a Device Profile an Analyzing Model an Analyzing Script or a Storage Profile e via the WaitMode parameter it can be configured whether Continue shall wait until the specified Con figuration File has finished its operation or not o typically it does not make sense to wait for Interface Profiles and Device Profiles or for Analyzing Models Analyzing Scripts and Storage Profiles in case they are operating on online data o incase of Analyzing Models Analyzing Scripts and Storage Profiles which are operating on offline data it can make sense to wait until the execution e g the calculation or the storage has finished e the Pause 01 Analyzing Script within the example location shows another example about how to use this Analyzing Function Stop e allows to stop a Configuration File an Interface Profile a Device Profile an Analyzing Model an Analyz ing Script or a Storage Profile e the Stop 01 Analyzing Script within the example location shows another example about how to use this Analyzing Function RemoveData e incase an Analyzing Model or Analyzing Script is operating on offline data the calculated results remain below Main gt Servers gt
86. Profile without any benefit This chapter contains the following topics e Creation of a new Storage Profile for offline Data 6 16 2 Creation of a new Storage Profile for offline Data Open the STS Explorer e Open the Storage System and ensure that the STS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Storage System workspace e Ensure that you have several data available below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Offline Data gt All Offline Data branch of the MDS Explorer Functionality e Method 1 for the creation of a new Storage Profile o Within the STS Explorer expand the Main gt Editors gt Storage Profile Editors branch o Drag the SPE Binary T001 with the left mouse into the empty space at the right side of the STS Ex plorer An empty SPE Binary T001 is opened automatically o Press the New button in order to create a new Storage Profile The new Storage Profile is displayed by the SPE Binary T001 with default values o This method works in all cases even in case there is no X Tools Server connected at the moment It can be used for the creation and configuration of Storage Profiles for cases where the target X Tools Server is not present at the moment English Release 2012 09 105 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS e Method 2 for the creation of a new Storage Profile o Within the STS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Librar
87. S Monitoring System e Visualization of online and offline data via Monitoring Views and Monitoring Charts e Viewing of the currently available items via the Monitoring System Explorer o available Monitoring Charts o available Monitoring Views o connected X Tools Servers for each connected X Tools Server the following information is available available Monitoring View Files available visualization specific plug ins Monitoring Process Modules 3 1 2 6 ANS Analyzing System e Graphical configuration of analysis tasks for online and offline data calculations via Analyzing Models e Textual configuration of analysis tasks for online and offline data calculations via Analyzing Scripts e Encapsulation of analysis tasks for online and offline data calculations via User Functions e Viewing of the currently available items via the Analyzing System Explorer o available Analyzing Model Editors o available Analyzing Script Editors o available User Function Editors o connected X Tools Servers for each connected X Tools Server the following information is available available Analyzing Model Files available Analyzing Script Files available User Function Files available Analyzing Functions available User Functions English Release 2012 09 17 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 3 1 2 7 STS Storage System e Configuration of storage tasks via Storage Profiles e Configuration of loading t
88. S CMS e The downgrade is being performed only for the IEEE1394 devices which are currently attached to the PC A manual installation of the old IEEE1394 driver may be necessary for all IEEE1394 devices which are being attached to the PC after the downgrade e While the downgrade is in progress the hardware assistant of Windows may pop up for each device Typically it disappears automatically after a few moments while the downgrade is in progress Depending to the configuration of the operating system it can happen that the automatic installation of the device driver must be chosen within the hardware assistant in order to continue the installation In case Windows asks whether the newer driver file shall be replaced by the older driver file confirm this operation 4 1 3 3 Update of Analyzing Models The interface of Analyzing Functions can change from one version of X Tools to the next version Before the start of each Analyzing Model the X Tools Server verifies whether the interface description of the Analyzing and User functions from the Analyzing Model match the interface definitions of the currently present functions In case the interfaces do not match the Analyzing Model suspends with an according log entry In order to receive a runnable Analyzing Model again the Analyzing Model must be opened within an Analyz ing Model Editor The Analyzing Model Editor is able to automatically update the Analyzing Model in most cases After the Analy
89. S Documents SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction EN pdf English Release 2012 09 27 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 4 1 3 Migration from earlier Versions of X Tools 4 1 3 1 Overview In general multiple versions of X Tools can be installed simultaneously at the same computer when each ver sion is put into another directory However it is not possible to have two instances of the X Tools Server run ning at the same time Via the concept of locations for Configuration Files multiple versions of X Tools can use the same Configura tion Files so that all changes within one version also become available to the other installed versions See point 6 5 for further information about locations for Configuration Files It must be considered that file compatibility is provided only from earlier to newer versions of X Tools There fore newer versions of X Tools are able to read the files which have been saved by earlier versions but earlier versions of X Tools may not be able to read the files which were saved by newer version Before the installation of a newer version of X Tools is being started it must be decided whether the previous installation shall be kept or not The following chapters provide the steps for both kinds of installation with and without keeping of the previous version Independently to this decision it is recommended to create a backup copy of all relevant files X Tools
90. S button brings the Storage System to the front in case it is opened already and opens it in case it is not opened yet MDS Explorer MMS DMS MTS ANS SIS Figure 15 Main Menu Bar of the X Tools Client Main Status Bar The e main status bar of the X Tools Client contains the following functionalities left to right visualization of the current status message in case there is any combo box for the selection of the X Tools Server in case one or more are available otherwise the cur rent status message is displayed English Release 2012 09 37 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS e icons which represent the current status of the Configuration Files of the currently chosen X Tools Server via the icon itself e g through colors and via the tool tip of each icon o status of Interface Profiles o status of Device Profiles o status of Analyzing Models o status of Analyzing Scripts o status of Storage Profiles e current date and time of the X Tools Client Figure 16 Main Status Bar of the X Tools Client Window Size and Position The following window size and position functionalities are provided by the X Tools Client e The Full Screen button from the title bar each window can be used in order to put it into full screen mode Figure 17 Full Screen Button e In full screen mode the Restore button can be used in order to bring the window back to its original size Alternatively a double click onto the
91. SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIEMENS SIPLUS CMS SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction English Release 2012 09 English Release 2012 09 SIPLUS CMS Preface 1 Scope of Delivery 2 Product Characteristics 3 Installation 4 Quick Reference 5 Tutorials 6 Reference Part Overview 7 List of Abbreviations 8 Contact Information 9 1 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Safety Guidelines This document contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety as well as to avoid property damage The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol notices referring to property damage only have no safety alert symbol Danger Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Warning Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury Caution Used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or mod erate injury gt ee Notice Used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potential situation which if not avoided may result in an undesirable result or state When several danger levels apply the notices of the highest level lower number are always displa
92. SYStOMS sosise erian eeindi kaen dine ceset ene edes lade sdlstade EaR E AENA AA AOA EEEa AEA 136 7 1 1 benera aiT a AA T TA a ate dnvaattetieadeeee 136 7 1 2 Microso WINdOWS XPi iso8 sheds aie Bain A a e Aare Shit 136 7 1 3 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 meen ccc eters ee eeneee eee TREE EEE AA AEREE aea 136 7 1 4 Microsoft WIndows 7 22 seccetescdeed Like cevi soe ec o iei E E E E Ea REEE 137 7 2 Time Synchronization sissies ronnie ai tence ee aeaea ei eea Teede taeae a EETA ET ek tennant anit 138 7 2 1 General 25 fiir tee ee a ee ene a ae E A Oe eee at 138 7 2 2 Setup a Windows XP Time Server ccecceceeceeceeeeeeeeeecaeceeeeeseesecaaaeceeeeeeeeeceuaeeeeeeneeeeees 138 7 2 3 Setup a Windows XP Time enin a aa a aa eE a a a a A a 138 7 2 4 Setup of a Computer which is Time Client and Time Server simultaneously 055 139 7 2 5 Microsoft Hotfix 951531 arinin aroe a op aesalasatessance a A a R A aS 140 7 3 M mory Optimizations icc8 fu caine eee Ane eee A i Bee Ais 140 7 3 1 General sevice haces E ce setae T ited ce fests tania eine cca aa tea dees 140 7 3 2 Default Ring Buffer SiZe jcisuecccel dadiee ne eed ie ceeel nade ane cee ee Ai iae ird aoa Eea E 140 7 3 3 AIIOCATION SIZE seca eisai E N sade ce tbtas ledu EE ai ce titan ladachs seas tasacsetentaseeevatentaeeangsaetadiead 142 7 3 4 OMING Data esse Sates eR E ate eae ERREA AREA anaes inane ARa REEE TAE Aa veri his aA oes 142 7 3 5 Dealing with very huge Amounts o
93. T001 is opened automatically and also opens the MTC ynm T001 In addition the dropped data is added to and visualized by the opened Monitoring Chart automatically English Release 2012 09 107 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS e The following screenshot shows an example of a 3D visualization 1 Online Data with absolute Timestamps 2011 01 13 14 13 05 600 000 000 GMT 01 00 H2D 01 Histogram2DForSignal 138 458 Figure 50 MVE Standard T001 with a 3D Visualization e Several mechanisms are available for the changing of the visualization of the displayed data o When the left mouse button is being pressed the displayed cuboid can be rotated o When the right mouse button is being pressed the displayed cuboid can be moved e Via the tool bar in the right corner of each Monitoring Chart basic functionalities are available o each axis of the cuboid can be stretched and shrunken independently o all axes of the cuboid can be stretched and shrunken simultaneously o the cursors can be turned on off o the last zooming shifting and scrolling operations can be undone redone o the visualization can be paused continued Try it out gt Create a new Monitoring View gt Drag some 2 dimensional online data from the MDS Explorer into the Monitoring View in order to visual ize the data curves gt Pause the visualization turn the cursors on and take a look onto the displayed measurement values Co
94. T001 with a new Device Profile 0 0 0 eecccccceetteeeente ee ee ene eeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 56 Figure 27 DPE ION AnalogInput T001 with an opened Device Profile cccccccccecceeeeeteeeeenteeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaas 58 Figure 28 MVE Standard T001 with a new Monitoring View cceccceceeeeeeenee eee e eae ee eeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeneaas 61 Figure 29 MVE Standard T001 with an opened Monitoring ViCW ccccccccecieeeeeneeeeeeecneeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 63 Figure 30 SPE Binary T001 with a new Storage Profile eccccceccececeeeeee cette eset tenets ee eeeeeeeaeeeseenaeeeeteneeeeenenaes 65 Figure 31 SPE Binary T001 with an opened Storage Profile cccccceeccceeeeeeeeeeeenee eect enneeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeesteneeeeenaees 67 Figure 32 ODL Standard T001 with some Offline Data Files cccccccceeeceee enn eeeeenneeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 70 Figure 33 Loading Progress Dialog ccccccccucceciieeeeeiieee ee enneee ee eeee ee eeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeneeesesnieeesenieeeeeeaes 71 Figure 34 LPE Standard T001 with a new Loading Profile 0 0 cccccccccteeeeeenee eect ence eect tcieeeeetaeeeeeeaeeeeteneeeenenaees 72 Figure 35 LPE Standard T001 with an opened Loading Profile cccceccccccceeeeeeneeeeeeenneeeseeneeeeeeneeeeeenneeeeeaas 74 Figure 36 ODL Standard T001 with some Offline Data Files cccccccccscceeeeenee escent ee eeenaeeeseeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeneaas 76 Figure 37 AME Standard T00
95. There are nearly no differences between the visualization of online and offline data The major difference is that offline data can not be running thus the Pause Visualization and Continue Visualization buttons do not have any effects on offline data e The creation and handling of Monitoring Views is identical for online data and offline data see 6 8 e Within each Monitoring View online data and offline data can be visualized simultaneously e In order to visualize any of the currently available offline data drag the desired data from the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Offline Data branch of the MDS Explorer into an empty MVE Standard T001 or into an opened Monitoring Chart Up to 32 data can be put into one Monitoring Chart e Each Monitoring View can be switched between visualization of online data and visualization of offline data In order to switch a the visualization between online data and offline data the following possibilities are available o The time domain online or offline of each Monitoring Chart can be changed via its Chart Options dialog call the context menu of the Monitoring Chart and choose Chart Options in order to open the Chart Options dialog Within this dialog the Time Domain cell of the Chart Options table allows to choose any of the available time domains After the time domain has been changed the Monitor ing Chart starts to display the data with the known names from the specified time domai
96. Tools Client Multiple Main Profiles can be created for the X Tools Client but only one Main Profile can be started at a time The X Tools Client connects to all of the X Tools Servers which are specified via the currently started Main Profile The X Tools Client is delivered with a default Main Profile which automatically is being started during the startup of the X Tools Client and establishes a connection to the local X Tools Server In case the remote capabilities of X Tools are not needed the provided default Main Profile allows the usage of X Tools without the need to bother about any client server specific issues This chapter contains the following topics e Creation of new Main Profiles e Opening of existing Main Profiles e Starting and Stopping of Main Profiles e Securing of the X Tools Server e X Tools Server Connectivity Dialog 6 3 2 Creation of new Main Profiles Open the MMS Explorer e Open the Main Management System and ensure that the MMS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Main Management System workspace Functionality e Within the MMS Explorer expand the Main gt Editors gt Main Profile Editors branch e Drag the MPE Standard T001 with the left mouse into the empty space at the right side of the MMS Ex plorer An empty MPE Standard T001 is opened automatically e Press the New button in order to create a new Main Profile The new Main Profile is displayed by the MPE Standard T001 with default val
97. YourServer gt Offline Data gt All Offline Data also after the Analyzing Model Script has been stopped so that other systems e g following Analyzing Models Scripts or follow ing Storage Profiles can continue to process these results e inorder to remove previously created offline data automatically RemoveData is being used e the RemoveData 01 Analyzing Script within the example location shows another example about how to use this Analyzing Function English Release 2012 09 111 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS WaitForCF allows to wait until a Configuration File has reached the specified state this Analyzing Function is being used especially in cases where multiple Analyzing Models Scripts and or Storage Profiles have to run in parallel because it allows to use Start in order to start these multiple Configuration Files first and to wait until the last of them has reached the state of interest afterwards the WaitForCF 01 Analyzing Script within the example location shows another example about how to use this Analyzing Function WaitForEDT allows to wait until a certain date and time has been reached this Analyzing Function can be used in order to perform measurement and analysis tasks periodically e g once each hour or once each day the WaitForEDT 01 Analyzing Script within the example location shows another example about how to use this Analyzing Function IsDa
98. a certain Storage Profile can be loaded var main the location Offline Files also must be used by the following Storage Profile Measurement Tasks Loading of Data IFN AI the following Configuration Files must be running Interface Profile Files Measurement Tasks Loading of Data Simulation T001 Device Profile Files Measurement Tasks Loading of Data IFN AI Storage Profile Files Measurement Tasks Loading of Data IFN AI var StartTime var EndTime the current data may be written still so let s load until a little bit before now EndTime GetTime 100 we want to load a total of 5 minutes StartTime EndTime 300 load the data from the specified time interval LoadData Measurement Tasks Loading of Data IFN AlI spf xts wu A Append A wu A Each Value A wu Minimum Time and Maximum Time StartTime 0 EndTime 7 4 7 7 Loading of the last Files from a Storage Profile once The Analyzing Script Load with Storage Profile Latest Files once from the example location shows an exam ple of how the last stored files from a certain Storage Profile can be loaded var main the location Offline Files also must be used by the following Storage Profile Measurement Tasks Loading of Data IFN AI the following Configuration Files must be running Interface Profile Files Measurement Tasks Loading of Data Simulation T001 Device Pro
99. able the mode and the parameters of the start event can be configured The stor ing of the configured data can be started in dependence to the current value of a data date based or timer based e Within the Stop Event table the mode and the parameters of the stop event can be configured The stor ing of the configured data can be stopped in dependence to the current value of a data date based or timer based e Within the Pre Trigger table the mode and the parameters of the pre trigger can be configured e Within the Post Trigger table the mode and the parameters of the post trigger can be configured English Release 2012 09 65 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS e Within the Disk Clean Up table the mode and the parameters of the disk clean up can be configured The clean up of files can be based on the age of files it can limit the used memory or it can assure some re maining memory e Within the Disk Limitation table the mode and the parameters of the disk limitation can be configured In case the disk limitation is enabled the Storage Profile will leave the specified absolute or relative amount of memory free at the hard disk e Within the Data table the to be stored data are listed In order to add an additional data which shall be stored simple enter the name of the data into the Name cell of the last line Alternatively the to be stored data also can be dragged from the MDS Explorer into t
100. able Files installation completed Installing X Tools Client X Tools Client installation completed Installing X Tools Server m Installation Progress C Program Files SIPLUS CM54000 ANE Analyzing Models Filter BP 02 amf xts Cancel Figure 12 Installation progress of the X Tools Client and X Tools Server After all components have been installed successfully the following message box appears SIPLUS CMS4000 Setup xs i The selected components have been installed successfully Figure 13 Installation finished The installation of X Tools also can be performed without the Setup by a manual copy of the Client and or Server directories from the installation media to the target directory In this case the other software compo nents like redistributable files or license manager must be installed manually 4 1 2 Create Shortcuts on the Desktop The Setup creates a shortcut to the X Tools Client at the desktop automatically The following paths can be used in order to create additional shortcuts manually e Open the Windows Explorer e Drag the following file from your installation directory with the left mouse button to the desktop while keep ing the lt Alt gt button pressed ASIPLUS CMS X Tools Client System Bin X Tools Client exe e Drag the following file from your installation directory with the left mouse button to the desktop while keep ing the lt Alt gt button pressed SIPLUS CM
101. ailable functionality the following documentation is available e SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 02 Master Data System o provides detailed information about the functionality which is provided by the Master Data System e SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 03 Main Management System o provides detailed information about the functionality which is provided by the Main Management Sys tem e SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 04 Device Management System o provides detailed information about the functionality which is provided by the Device Management System e SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 05 Monitoring System o provides detailed information about the functionality which is provided by the Monitoring System e SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 06 Analyzing System o provides detailed information about the functionality which is provided by the Analyzing System e SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 07 Storage System o provides detailed information about the functionality which is provided by the Storage System e SIPLUS CMS X Tools Release Notes o provides additional information about the released version of SIPLUS CMS X Tools e SIPLUS CMS X Tools Change Log o provides an overview about the changes which have been introduced with the current version of SIPLUS CMS X Tools 1 2 Validity of this Document This document is valid for the following software e SIPLUS CMS X Tools Demo V 03 05 e SIPLUS CMS X Tools Standard V 03 05 e S
102. ake into effect accord ing to the latest configuration any of the contained Configuration Files can be started Configuration File locations can be used for various applications e g in case of mobile systems which have to be configured differently at each measurement point in case specialized configurations are wanted for error tracking or in case the authors of the tutorial want to provide a large range of example configurations which can show the capabilities of X Tools in addition to the descriptions within the tutorial This chapter contains the following topics e Adding of a Configuration File Location e Removing of a Configuration File Location 6 5 2 Adding of a Configuration File Location Open the DMS Explorer e Open the Device Management System and ensure that the DMS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Device Management System workspace Functionality e Expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer branch of the DMS Explorer e In order to add another Configuration File location call the context menu for the Files item within the DMS Explorer and choose Add Location e Within the upcoming Add Location dialog choose any symbolic name for your new Configuration File lo cation and specify the path to this location at the disk o Incase the path to the location at the disk is chosen first a default symbolic name is provided auto matically e Press OK in order to add the specified location to th
103. an X Y Envelope together with the calculated Envelopes English Release 2012 09 159 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 7 4 5 4 Monitoring of X Y Envelopes After the necessary envelopes have been calculated they can be used for monitoring of the currently present x and y data The following screenshot shows the Analyzing Model 50 Monitor XY Envelope from the example location which uses the above envelopes in order to monitor the current x and y online data Figure 67 Example of an Analyzing Model for the monitoring of the current x and y online Data The same task can be solved via an Analyzing Script also the following box shows the Analyzing Script 50 Monitor XY Envelope from the example location var main the following Analyzing Scripts must be started before this one 20 Create XY Envelope 40 Simulate x and y Data with Errors Control MonXYEnv x y XY Envelope XBufferWarning XY Envelope UpperWarningBand XY Envelope LowerWarningBand XY Envelope XBufferError XY Envelope UpperErrorBand XY Envelope LowerErrorBand 0 0 0 true ControlUpper ControlLower Figure 68 Example of an Analyzing Script for the monitoring of the current x and y online Data Whenever a violation of the specified envelopes is detected MonXYEnv creates an according log entry English Release 2012 09 1
104. an be loaded e While the appending overwriting or exporting of the offline data is going on the Loading Progress or Export Progress dialog is being displayed The Cancel button can be used in order to cancel any ongo ing loading or export operation English Release 2012 09 70 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Preparing to load There are 1 file s to append Cancel _ Figure 33 Loading Progress Dialog e Each loaded offline data is displayed by the MDS Explorer below its Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Offline Data gt All Offline Data branch From there it can be dragged into the other systems of X Tools for further analysis and visualization tasks e Fora more detailed description of all available functionalities of the ODL Standard T001 refer to the ref erence manual of the Storage System chapter ODL Standard T001 Try it out gt Open the ODL Standard T001 for the local X Tools Server gt Browse your offline data file locations for already stored offline data files gt Load some offline data files and append additional periods of time to the first loaded data afterwards The loaded offline data is being displayed within the MDS Explorer gt Overwrite the already loaded offline data with another period of time of the data The information within the MDS Explorer is being updated accordingly gt Export some of the present offline data files
105. anagement System workspace Functionality e Method 1 for the creation of a new Interface Profile o Within the DMS Explorer expand the Main gt Editors gt Interface Profile Editors branch o Drag the IPE Simulation T001 with the left mouse into the empty space at the right side of the DMS Explorer An empty IPE Simulation T001 is opened automatically o Press the New button in order to create a new Interface Profile The new Interface Profile is displayed by the IPE Simulation T001 with default values o This method works in all cases even in case there is no X Tools Server connected at the moment It can be used for the creation and configuration of Interface Profiles for cases where the target X Tools Server is not present at the moment e Method 2 for the creation of a new Interface Profile o Within the DMS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Interfaces branch o Click onto the present Simulation T001 item with the right mouse button in order to open the context menu o In order to create a new Interface Profile for the currently selected interface choose New Interface Profile from the context menu o This method works only in case the target X Tools Server is present but it is more convenient and faster as it automatically also determines the target X Tools Server of the new Interface Profile e The following screenshot shows an example of a new Interface Profile Interface Pr
106. anual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Each report is stored to the location which has been configured within the Automatic Reports Parameters table The path below the specified location contains the following parts e MTE Reports e directory structure at which the Monitoring View is stored The file name of each report contains the following parts e name of the Monitoring View e timestamp at which the report has been created o The report is being created at the moment of the trigger event the capture delay However the date information within the file name points to the moment of the trigger event Example e Location which is specified within the Automatic Reports Parameters table Example Location e absolute path of the location Example Location C Example Location e storage path of the Monitoring View Example Location Monitoring View Files My Directory Subfolder e Example file name full path o C Example Location MTE Reports My Directory Subfolder My Monitoring View 2011 01 28 12 53 00 000 000 000 png The following rules apply for the created reports e The width of the Monitoring View in number of pixels matches the value of the Width cell from the Auto matic Reports Parameters table e The height of the Monitoring View in number of pixels matches the value of the Height cell from the Automatic Reports Parameters table e The file format and the file extension of the created file is pn
107. any of the currently present Configuration File locations also is shown below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Libraries gt User Functions branch From there the User Functions can be edited and they can be dropped into Analyzing Models and Analyz ing Scripts Each User Function is displayed below the category which has been specified within the User Func tion Properties table of the UFE Standard T001 e The short and full names of each User Function must be unique o Incase there is an Analyzing Function with the same name as a User Function the Analyzing Func English tion is being used for the calculation and the User Function is being ignored In case there are two User Functions of identical name none of them is being used for the calculation and the parent Analyzing Model or Analyzing Script suspends User Functions which have a naming conflict either with an Analyzing Function or with another User Function show this status via an additional icon below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Libraries gt User Functions branch In order to resolve the naming conflict of a User Function the according User Function must be opened the short and or full names must be changed and the User Function must be saved after wards Release 2012 09 103 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 15 7 Examples of User Functions The example location which is delivered
108. ard T001 with a default Analyzing Script which also contains the dropped data is opened automatically o This method works only in case the target data is present but it is more convenient and faster as it automatically also determines the target X Tools Server of the new Analyzing Script The following screenshot shows an example of a new Analyzing Script Fal Save As Figure 39 ASE Standard T001 with a new Analyzing Script The Analyzing Script Settings table at the top of the ASE Standard T001 displays the general file infor mation and allows entering additional file attributes like a description and the name of the author of the file and his company Within the Analyzing Script Parameters table the basic parameters for the execution of the Analyzing Script are being defined o The default configuration of Analyzing Scripts typically allows executing the defined analysis without additional changes to the parameters o Fora detailed description of the meaning and usage of the parameters of Analyzing Scripts refer to the reference manual of the Analyzing System chapter Analyzing Script Editors 88 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS e Within the Offline Time Configuration table the time interval onto which the calculation shall be applied is being defined The contents of this table can be configured only in case the output data class is specified as Offline data o The
109. ared e Incase at least one Interface Profile has been started by the user the status bar of the X Tools Client displays the current status of Interface Profiles via the according colored icon The tool tip of this icon provides detailed information about the number of currently started and suspended Interface Profiles o Note that the status bar always displays the status of exactly one X Tools Server thus also the icon for the current status of Interface Profiles displays the status of only the currently chosen X Tools Server Try it out gt Start an existing Interface Profile for the Simulation interface The devices which are configured within the Interface Profile are being simulated and appear below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Interfaces gt Simulation T001 branch immediately gt Stop the currently running Interface Profile for the Simulation interface The simulation of devices is being stopped and all simulated devices disappear within the DMS Explorer of the X Tools Server Ready At this point you know how to start and stop existing Interface Profiles for the Simulation interface in order to start and stop the simulation of devices English Release 2012 09 54 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 7 Device Configuration and Device Profiles 6 7 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn how to configure devices via Device Profiles A Device Profile
110. art to Stop Interval 95 seconds the chosen interval should be short below the expected amount of time between the start and stop triggers which belong to one processed part English Release 2012 09 172 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 7 4 8 4 Summary The following Configuration Files are being used by this chapter Monitoring Views found in Monitoring View Files Measurement Tasks Advanced parallel Storing Name Description Plant Online This Monitoring View displays all data from the simulated plant Plant Offline This Monitoring View can display the offline data which has been stored by the Storage Profile Plant In case there is always one offline data directory loaded the visualized data curves are identical because each offline data category contains the data from one processed part and the simulated data is identical for each simulated part Analyzing Scripts found in Analyzing Script Files Measurement Tasks Advanced parallel Storing Name Description Plant This Analyzing Script simulates the basic komponents of the plant Storage Profiles found in Storage Profile Files Measurement Tasks Advanced parallel Storing Name Description Plant This Storage Profile uses the parallel storage mode Start another parallel Storage when ever another Start Event occurs in order create one offline data directory per processed part English Relea
111. asks via Loading Profiles e Loading of offline data via Offline Data Loaders e Viewing of the currently available items via the Storage System Explorer o available Storage Profile Editors o available Loading Profile Editors o available Offline Data Loaders o connected X Tools Servers for each connected X Tools Server the following information is available available Storage Profile Files available Loading Profile Files available storage format specific plug ins Storage Process Modules English Release 2012 09 18 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 3 2 Hard and Software Requirements 3 2 1 Hardware e PC with Windows XP Professional 32 Bit Service Pack 3 or e PC with Windows XP Embedded 32 Bit Service Pack 2 or higher or e PC with Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition 32 Bit Service Pack 2 or e PC with Windows 7 Professional 32 Bit Service Pack 1 o Microsoft Hotfix 958347 installed Windows XP only see release notes for details o Microsoft Hotfix 951531 installed Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 only in case the Windows time service is being used see point 0 for details o CPU with 2 1 2 GHz or multi core CPU o working memory 2 512 MByte 2 GByte recommended o OpenGL and or DirectX enabled graphic controller from 1024x768 Pixels 1280x1024 Pixels or more recommended o IEEE1394 Ethernet and USB interfaces e power supply units and connecting cables depending on the u
112. atically by X Tools Monitoring Views Monitoring Views are being used in order to visualize any of the currently pre sent online and or offline data In addition Monitoring Views can be config ured to wait for trigger events and to create automatic reports See point 6 8 6 11 and 6 25 Analyzing Models Analyzing Models are being edited graphically and are being used in order to perform calculations which base on online and or offline data See point 6 13 Analyzing Scripts Analyzing Scripts are being edited textually and are being used in order to perform calculations which base on online and or offline data See point 6 14 User Functions User Functions are being edited graphically and are being used in order to encapsulate analysis tasks in order to make analysis tasks re usable and in order to protect the know how onto which the analysis task bases See point 6 15 Storage Profiles Storage Profiles are being used in order to store any of the currently present online or offline data See point 6 9 and 6 16 Loading Profiles Loading Profiles are being used in order to pre configure which offline data shall be loaded out of the possibly massive amount of present offline data See point 6 10 Handling Most Configuration Files can be started paused continued and stopped by the user After a Configuration File has been started X Tools does not care about the actual file at the disk any m
113. ation English Release 2012 09 117 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Try it out gt Display some data within a Monitoring Chart gt Store a snapshot of the displayed data gt After the snapshot has been stored load the stored offline data gt Display the loaded data within a new Monitoring Chart and verify that the correct values and times of all data have been stored Ready At this point you know how to use the data snapshot functionality in order to store all of the values of the data which are currently visualized by a Monitoring Chart 6 22 Receiving of Data from standard OPC UA Servers 6 22 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn how to receive data from standard OPC UA servers This chapter contains the following topics e Connecting to an OPC UA Server e Configuring of the Data of interest e Using of the Data of interest 6 22 2 Connecting to an OPC UA Server Open the DMS Explorer e Open the Device Management System and ensure that the DMS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Device Management System workspace Functionality e Within the DMS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Interfaces branch e Click onto the present OPC UA T001 item with the right mouse button in order to open the context menu e Choose New Interface Profile from the context menu o An IPE OPC UA T001 with a new empty Interface Profi
114. ave Report context menu item within the Action Area of the AME Standard T001 Try it out gt Put multiple Analyzing and or User Functions into an AME Standard T001 gt Save a report of the current Analyzing Model gt Open the created HTML document The HTML document contains all information about the Analyzing Model and its contained Analyzing and or User Functions as well as a draft of the complete Analyzing Model Ready At this point you know how to save reports of Analyzing Models English Release 2012 09 127 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 27 Fast Analysis via the MDS Explorer 6 27 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn how to prepare the system in order to become able to start fast analysis tasks for online and offline data via the MDS Explorer This chapter contains the following topics e Creation of a Location for Fast Analysis Scripts e Creation of a new Fast Analysis Script e Opening of existing Fast Analysis Scripts e Using of Fast Analysis Scripts 6 27 2 Creation of a Location for Fast Analysis Scripts Open the ANS Explorer e Open the Analyzing System and ensure that the ANS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Ana lyzing System workspace Functionality e Expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer branch of the ANS Explorer e In order to add a Fast Analysis location call the context menu for the Files item within the ANS
115. ble default time interval for loading of offline data can be config ured e Within the Included Data table the data which shall be loaded are listed Data which is present within the directory that is being loaded but is not present within the Included Data table is not being loaded in case Use included Data List is being chosen o Inorder to add an additional data which shall be loaded simple enter the name of the data into the Name Cell of the last line Alternatively the to be loaded data also can be dragged from the MDS Ex plorer into the Name cell of the last line o The Loading Mode and Loading Parameters cells of each to be loaded data can be used in order to configure the intervals in which the data shall be loaded o When an entry of the Included Data table is selected the Data Time Configuration table displays its current time configuration and allows editing it e Within the Excluded Data table the data which shall not be loaded are listed Data which is present within the Excluded Data table is not being loaded in case Use excluded Data List is being chosen English Release 2012 09 72 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS e The Save and Save As buttons are used in order to save the configured Loading Profile with all of its settings All saved Loading Profiles are shown by the STS Explorer Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Loading Profile Files
116. braries gt Analyzing Functions branch also a User Function from the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Libraries gt User Functions branch can be dragged into the empty Analyzing System This method works only in case the target X Tools Server is present but it is more convenient and faster as it automatically also determines the target X Tools Server of the new User Function e Method 3 for the creation of a new User Function O This method works only in case the UFE Standard T001 is defined as Default Editor for Functions within the Global Options Editor of the X Tools Client Within the MDS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Online Data or the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Offline Data branch Drag an online or offline data from the MDS Explorer into the empty Analyzing System workspace A UFE Standard T001 with a default User Function which also contains the dropped data is opened automatically This method works only in case the target data is present but it is more convenient and faster as it automatically also determines the target X Tools Server of the new User Function e Method 4 for the creation of a new User Function English Open an existing Analyzing Model or create a new Analyzing Model Within the AME Standard T001 press the Convert button The Analyzing Model is converted into an identical User Function automatically The new User Func tio
117. ccccccceeeeececececeeeceeeaaaeaeceeeeeeeseeanaeceeeeeseseneaeaeeeeeeeeteees 156 7 4 5 3 Visualization of X Y Envelopes cccccceeeeeeencneceeeeeeeesecenaaeceeeeeseseccuaeeeeeeeeeesensenieeeeees 158 7 4 5 4 Monitoring of X Y Envelopes 00 cceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeaeeeseeeaeeesenaaeeeseeaaees 160 7 4 5 5 EXAM PIG heii scat heer 5 Sees Ak Ca Pack Le a aS Sata a ae E 161 74 5 6 SUMMA soso As EE E I ce eels done A A E A E 161 7 4 6 SPeSctrum BAE 0161 E E E E A E A E E E deeeed Os 162 7 4 6 1 General ict el eee eee ie E a E A E T 162 7 4 6 2 Creation of Spectrum Envelopes 2 ccccccceceeeeeeeenneeeeceeeeeeeseccceaeceeeeeeeseccacaeeeeeeeeeesess 162 7 4 6 3 Visualization of Spectrum Envelopes ccccccecccceeeeeeeeceecaeceeeeeeeseccacaeeeeeeesesesnusateeeeess 164 7 4 6 4 Monitoring of Spectrum Envelopes c cccccececeeceececeeeeeeeeeecceeaeeeseeeseeseaeeeeeeseeseesnaeees 164 7 4 6 5 Examples minerne ade ie niet tive Me nie ed eee 165 74 6 6 SUMIMANY we oka dian E T oie ie eed nll aden 166 TAT Automatic loading of Data c i aeran Aan AENEAN erent eee I nets AE AEAEE TEE EER EAA ATE 167 7 4 7 1 General EE EE A E he A neti E E E T E eee Anaad T 167 7 4 1 2 Basic loading Of Offline Datta erae E AAEE AEA 167 74 7 3 Loading of offline Data Files from a certain Period of Time ccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneees 167 7 4 1 4 Loading with Loading Profiles and Loading MOdeS
118. ch contain timestamps in ns between 315576000 315576000 10 years 10 years are considered to be data with relative timestamps and all data which contain only timestamps which are smaller or bigger are considered to be data with absolute timestamps e absulte timestamp in textual form o example Timestamp Date Timestamp Time Timestamp ns Value 07 11 2007 17 37 13 688958640 2 36511230e 003 e relative timestamp in textual form o example Timestamp Days Timestamp Time Timestamp ns Value 0 00 00 00 123000000 2 36511230 6 003 Extended Data Types Extended data types are formats like 1 dimensional buffers 2 dimensional buffers or spectrums Their export format is principially identical to the export format of simple data types but of course the header rows contain other and or additional information In addition also the data rows provide another format which is more suitable for the representation of each extended data type Extended data types can be exported to but can not be imported from CSV files by the current version of X Tools English Release 2012 09 133 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 29 File Associations 6 29 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn about the types of files which can be opened in X Tools via a double click onto the file within the Explorer of Windows This chapter contains the following topics e Important Facts
119. context menu which is being called via a click onto the title bar of the window with the right mouse button The provided context menu allows switching the window mode between tabbed automatic and manual and also provides some further pos sibilities of configuration e The Close button from the title bar of each window can be used in order to close the window Figure 20 Close Button Tool Tips of Menu Buttons Each button from the menu bar of a dialog provides a tool tip which describes its functionality in short words In order to display the tool tip of a menu button simply move the mouse cursor above the menu button and wait some moments until the tool tip is being displayed English Release 2012 09 38 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Try it out gt After opening of the X Tools Client press the DMS and MTS buttons in order to open the Device Man agement System and the Monitoring System You can see that the DMS and MTS buttons are highlighted In addition at the top of the screen you can see the Device Management System in the background and the Monitoring System in the foreground gt Within the MTS Explorer expand the Main gt Editors gt Monitoring Charts branch and drag the MTC yt T001 with the left mouse into the empty space at the right side of the MTS Explorer A new Monitoring View Editor which contains the dropped MTC yt T001 is being opened automatically gt Drag an
120. cript gt Build an easy Analyzing Script which takes two online data from the MDS Explorer adds them together and outputs the result gt Save the Analyzing Script At the first save the Save As dialog will pop up and offers a default file name Change the default file name to Hello Analyzing Script and press OK in order to save it to the disk The new Analyzing Script now is displayed below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Analyzing Script Files branch of the ANS Explorer gt Take a look onto the Analyzing Scripts which are provided via the example location see point 6 5 in or der to see various application examples about the capabilities and usage of Analyzing Scripts Ready At this point you know how to create a new Analyzing Script which can be used in order to perform calculations based on online and or offline data English Release 2012 09 89 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 14 3 Opening of existing Analyzing Scripts Open the ANS Explorer e Open the Analyzing System and ensure that the ANS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Ana lyzing System workspace Functionality e Within the ANS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Analyzing Script Files branch e Drag one of the below Analyzing Scripts with the left mouse into the empty space at the right side of the ANS Explo
121. cript stores the configured data each defined time interval and every time when an alarm has been detected 7 4 4 2 Example The Sequence Control directory of the Analyzing Scripts within the example location contains the Analyzing Script Sequence Control 05 This Analyzing Script shows an example for the safe start of Configuration Files and for the alarm and time dependent storing Because the used input signals have a random noise the alarm will occur not always but only sometimes The alarm level can be changed within the Analyzing Model Se quence Control 03 in order to receive the alarm event more or less often e safe start of a Configuration File var SafeStart var ProfileName var TimeOut start the Configuration File ProfileName if it suspends we wait only for the amount of seconds which are defined through TimeOut Start ProfileName Wait TimeOut in case the Configuration File was suspended it will be stopped here Stop ProfileName e main function which defines the time interval and calls the measurement and analyzing tasks var main get the current time and define a flag to force storing var NextStore GetTime var StoreNow false define storing interval in seconds here every 120s will be stored var StoringInterval 120 run forever while 1 check if time for the next store has passed if GetTime gt NextStore StoreNow true NextStore
122. cripts dynamically Thus the names of all output data of a Fast Analysis Script are defined at the moment when the Fast Analysis Script is created o When the context menu of the MDS Explorer is called from above an online data it provides only those Fast Analysis Scripts whose Output Data Class is Online Data Accordingly the context menu provides only those Fast Analysis Scripts whose Output Data Class is Offline Data when it is called from above an offline data Try it out gt Create a new Fast Analysis Script gt Build an easy Analyzing Script which takes two variable input data adds them together and outputs the result gt Save the Analyzing Script to the Fast Analysis location At the first save the Save As dialog will pop up and offers a default file name Change the default file name to Hello Fast Analysis and press OK in or der to save it to the disk The new Fast Analysis Script now is displayed below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Analyzing Script Files branch of the ANS Explorer gt Take a look onto the Analyzing Scripts which are provided via the Fast Analysis Location in order to see application examples about the capabilities and usage of Fast Analysis Scripts Ready At this point you know how to create a new Fast Analysis Script which can be used in order to perform calcula tions based on online and or offline data 6 27 4 Opening of exist
123. cts to the X Tools Server with the username Tutorial In case the provided combination of user name and password would be wrong the connection attempt fails and according in formation is output to the system log of the X Tools Client Ready At this point you know how to open and edit the user accounts of the X Tools Server English Release 2012 09 47 I 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 4 4 The System Log Viewer Open the System Log Viewer e Open the Main Management System and ensure that the MMS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Main Management System workspace e In order to open the System Log Viewer for the X Tools Client call the context menu for the Main item within the MMS Explorer and choose View System Log e In order to open the System Log Viewer for a connected X Tools Server call the context menu for the Main gt Servers gt YourServer item within the MMS Explorer and choose View System Log e The System Log Viewer also can be opened via the System Log Viewer button from the menu bar of the Main Management System workspace In this case the last time displayed System Log Viewer for the X Tools Client or for the connected X Tools Server is being opened automatically o The Main item from the MMS Explorer can be dragged into the empty System Log Viewer in order to start viewing of the system log of the X Tools Client o Any of the present Main g
124. cy of 10 Hz and an amplitude of 5 The second sine wave has a frequency of 100 Hz and an amplitude of 10 The according trigger signal which represents the speed is an impulse signal with a frequency of 10 Hz The following screenshot shows both signals Trigger Vibration 25 600 25 650 25 700 ae ee 25 950 a 200 26 25 800 250 260 2010 01 15 13 42 26 000 ss mmm GMT 01 00 25 500 25 550 2010 01 15 13 42 25 500 ss mmm Figure 63 Example of the Input Signals for the Order Analysis Spectrum Calculation In order to get a better understanding of the order analysis additionally to the order spectrum there is also a frequency spectrum calculated The order spectrum is calculated by the Analyzing Model from above and the frequency spectrum is calculated by an Analyzing Model which can be found within the example Configuration File location English Release 2012 09 152 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS The following screenshot shows the two calculated spectra 1 Offline Data with absolute Timestamps 2010 01 15 13 42 25 215 000 000 GMT 01 00 2 InOrdRsmpl 02 FFT ols val 00 gt a lal n e me N Q N Q A AONO WO 1 Offline Data with absolute Timestamps 2010 01 15 13 42 25 700 100 000 GMT 01 00 InordRsmpl 02 Order FFT gt
125. d e Allocation Size 128 kBytes Calculation e AmountOfMemory bytes 2 100 128 kBytes 25 MBytes e Inthis example 25 MBytes are needed in order to be able to store the specified data to the hard disk Additional Notes e Incase the used hard disk is too slow to store all of the to be stored data the Storage System temporar ily can use more than two buffers for each to be stored data In case of a temporary slow hard disk this mechanism can ensure that the storing is continued without a data loss as long as there is enough work ing memory available for the additional buffers 7 3 4 Offline Data The amount of bytes within the working memory which are needed in order to load a given data is roughly calcu lated as follows e AmountOfMemory bytes NumberOfValues Values SizeOfOneValue bytes e SizeOfOneValue is dependent to the data type of the data see above Example e data type of the offline data file Decimal16 e NumberOfValues within the offline data file 1500 Values Calculation e AmountOfMemory bytes 1500 8 2 bytes 15 kBytes e Inthis example 15 kBytes are needed in order to be able to load the specified data 7 3 5 Dealing with very huge Amounts of Data For applications where a really huge amount of data must be acquired and stored additional details must be considered e At the start of a Storage Profile all of the files which shall receive the offline data must be created In
126. d e g started stopped opened from there e Foramore detailed description of all available functionalities of the IPE Simulation T001 and the other Interface Profile Editors refer to the reference manual of the Device Management System chapter Interface Profile Editors Try it out gt Create a new Interface Profile gt Configure the simulation of one ION AnalogInput T001 two ION VIB A T001 and one ION SIMATIC S7 300 T001 gt Save the Interface Profile At the first save the Save As dialog will pop up and offers a default file name Change the default file name to Hello Interface Profile and press OK in order to save it to the disk The new Interface Profile now is displayed below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Interface Profile Files branch of the DMS Explorer gt Take a look onto the Interface Profiles which are provided via the example location see point 6 5 in or der to see various application examples about the capabilities and usage of Interface Profiles Ready At this point you know how to create a new Interface Profile which can be used in order to simulate any of the devices which are supported by the X Tools Server 6 6 3 Opening of existing Interface Profiles Open the DMS Explorer e Open the Device Management System and ensure that the DMS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Device Management System workspace Functionality e
127. d in order to perform the storage of offline data to a storage location This information includes among others the names of the to be stored data paths trigger settings and clean up settings Multiple Storage Profiles can be started and running simultaneously at any time The offline data which is being stored by a running Storage Profile can be loaded as offline data afterwards via an Offline Data Loader Examples of Storage Profiles are found within the example Configuration File location which is being delivered together with X Tools See also point 6 9 for information about how to store online data via Storage Profiles In addition point 6 9 also shows how to open existing Storage Profiles and how to start and stop Storage Profiles as these operations are equal for all Storage Profiles these operations are not being explained within this chap ter again Whenever a Storage Profile with offline data as input runs into an error it stops automatically This is different to Storage Profiles with online data as input which suspend in such a situation and attempt to resume after the error condition is gone The main reasons for this different kind of handling are e for Storage Profiles with offline data as input it is much less likely that the error condition will disappear ever e amain use cases for Storage Profiles with offline data as input are sequential Analyzing Scripts see point 6 19 which could be blocked by a suspended Storage
128. d by the X Tools Server To sum up the safe mode detects severe error conditions shall reduce the downtime and shall keep the appli cation running 6 18 3 Safe Mode In order to allow the X Tools Server to startup in safe mode it must be started with the safe command line parameter Even in case the safe command line parameter is being provided the X Tools Server starts up in safe mode only in case the Initialization Log File indicates an error during the previous execution Typically there is no need to start the X Too s Server manually because it is started automatically either by the X Tools Client or during the startup of Windows The X Tools Client starts the X Tools Server without the safe com mand line parameter whereas the safe command line parameter is being used whenever the X Tools Server is being started automatically during the startup of Windows or by the X Tools Service In case the X Tools Server starts up in safe mode an artificial delay of 30 seconds is inserted between the starts of any two Configuration Files In addition according log messages are added to the System Log during the startup in safe mode In case a severe error has been detected and the X Tools Server is restarted in safe mode afterwards an email notification can be sent to the configured email recipients see Global Options Editor refer to the refer ence manual of the Main Management System chapter Global Options E
129. d the CTN Power Supply USB CTNs do not need any external power supply because they are powered via the USB cable from the used PC Driver Installation After connecting a USB CTN to the PC via USB for the first time the Windows operating system automatically will detect a new hardware device To use it the corresponding driver must be installed for it The used driver installs a virtual COM port so that the CTN becomes visible below the Ports COM and LPT item of the Windows Device Manager with its COM number As a result USB CTNs are accessed like serial devices by X Tools Whenever a USB CTN is being attached to the PC for the first time the hardware wizard of Windows starts automatically and wants to install a driver for the new device For the installation the following path has to be provided to the hardware wizard of Windows SIPLUS CMS Drivers USB USB CTNs have to be announced manually to X Tools after they have been attached and before they can be used They have to be announced as serial devices because the installed USB driver emulates a virtual COM port which must be used by X Tools in order to be able to access the device The Interface Profile Editor for the serial port interface see IPE Serial Port T001 must be used for the configuration of connections to USB CTNs 4 2 6 How to connect OPC UA Servers to the PC Ethernet Cable In order to connect an OPC UA server to X Tools an Ethernet cable must be plu
130. data type of the data and is calculated as follows o SizeOfOneValue bytes 8 bytes n bytes o 8 bytes are needed for each timestamp o n specifies the number of bytes dependent to the data type of the data Boolean and Integer8 values need 1 byte Integer16 values need 2 bytes Integer32 values need 4 bytes Integer64 values need 8 bytes Decimal32 values need 4 bytes Decimal64 values need 8 bytes English Release 2012 09 140 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Example 100 online data of data type Decimal32 are acquired Ring Buffer Size 100000 Values Calculation AmountOfMemory bytes 100 100000 8 4 bytes 114 MBytes In this example 114 MBytes are needed in order to be able to acquire the specified data with the speci fied ring buffer size Additional Notes The ring buffer size of each data must be chosen so that at least 10 seconds of data can be hold For ex ample in case a data is being acquired with 40 kHz the ring buffer must contain at least 40000 10 400000 values o In addition to the Default Ring Buffer Size from the Global Options Editor of the X Tools Server also a more granular configuration possibility is available for applications which have to deal with data of very different speeds Within the Device Profile Data table of each Device Profile Editor the Buffer Mode and Buffer Parameters columns can be shown With these settings
131. dd the two Analyzing Functions for the input and the one Ana lyzing Function for the output data directly into the User Function gt In order to provide the external interface specify input interfaces for all three Name input arguments of the In and Out Analyzing Functions gt Within the Provided Input Interfaces table assign short names like InO and In1 for the Name input arguments of the In Analyzing Functions and a short name like OutO for the Name input argument of the Out Analyzing Function gt Specify an output interface for the OutO output argument of the Out Analyzing Function gt Within the Provided Output Interfaces table assign a short name like Out1 for the OutO output argu ment of the Out Analyzing Function gt Within the User Function Properties table set a Full Name of HelloWorld2 a Short Name of HelloW2 and a Parent Category of Tutorial English Release 2012 09 96 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS gt The User Function looks like in the following example ke Provided cin nena a or na name of the simple data from the system ae 1 or n a name of the simple data from the system wh n a name of the data or values which shall be w Open Save Save As Convert Close Figure 43 UFE Standard T001 with the HelloW2 Example gt Compared to the User Function Hell
132. ddition Analyzing Models and Analyzing Scripts also can be configured to produce output data of class online see point 6 13 and point 6 14 Online data is maintained by the X Tools Server within ring buffers that are overwritten from the beginning whenever the end of the buffer is being reached The size of the ring buffer of each data can be configured indi vidually thus the amount of time which is available for each online data in memory can be determined by the user In order to save some online data permanently Storage Profiles see point 6 9 must be used Each ring buffer of online data should be configured to a size which can hold at least a few seconds of data For example in case a data acquisition is running with 40 kHz a ring buffer size of 400 000 values would be able to keep 10 seconds of the data In case of a ring buffer which is too small to hold the values of its data for a few seconds an according warning is written into the System Log of the X Tools Server Offline Data Offline data is defined as the data which has been stored to disk previously and which has been loaded via an Offline Data Loader see point 6 10 In addition Analyzing Models and Analyzing Scripts also can be configured to produce output data of class off line see point 6 13 and point 6 14 Offline data is maintained by the X Tools Server within static buffers which are modified only in case an accord ing operation is started by the use
133. dev ETEEN vide eaten 22 HSA eyes 2chesaetetce T T tides de taatdactasdunale suteces a A tanita 23 Software Installatione isi08 2 tice Bieda vee th talecextbnansaiiheia wlaitceeeitea tll AAN 23 Install X Tools and the System Documentation ecceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeneaes 23 Create Shortcuts on the DeSktop ccccceeeesecceceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeseccneaeeeeeeeeesecdaaeeeeeeeeeeeees 27 Migration from earlier Versions Of X TOOIS ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeecneeeeeeaeeeeeesaeeeetenaeeeeneaes 28 OVEIVICW Site aan Ae Mia Ae ees Se Ale ee Ale eee eee 28 New IEEE1394 Driver in V 03 03 0 cecccecceccecseeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeesaaeseeneesseeeesnaeeneneeeas 28 Update of Analyzing Modelirna loved sesuatiana A EO AAE 29 Update from V 03 01 SP1 or earlier to V 03 05 sssssessnnsnensssessrnrrrerssesrrnrrnrssrerrrnnnenserent 29 Parallel Installation to the old Version ssseesssssssrssesrrneserrrsssrraesrsnnssennnesrrnnesrnnnasennneans 29 Update from V 03 02 or later to V 03 05 ooo cece cece cece cece ee eeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeseceeeaeeeeeeeeeteesnaeees 30 Release 2012 09 3 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 4 1 3 5 1 Overwriting Of the Old Version sietiissrenii eer ninii ratana Ena En AAE EER RAAN FERE EE RERE EAER TEE 30 4 1 3 5 2 Parallel Installation to the Old Version eccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteeeaeeeeeeaeees 30 4 2 Hardware
134. directory and applies the loading modes which are configured within the specified Loading Profile LoadData X Tools Offline Data Files ION AnalogInput T001 wu P Append r Measurement Tasks Loading of Data Loading Modes 1lpf xts 7 4 7 5 Loading with Loading Profiles and Loading Times Loading Profiles and all of their contained filter functionality can be used in order to apply filters during the load ing of data The Analyzing Script Load with Loading Profile Loading Times from the example location shows the result of loading with a Loading Profile which has loading times configured var main the location X Tools Offline Data Files must point to the following directory of the X Tools installation Server User Example Offline Files X Tools Offline Data Files the following commands load data from the specified directory and applies the loading times which are configured within the specified Loading Profile LoadData X Tools Offline Data Files ION AnalogInput T001 Append Measurement Tasks Loading of Data Loading Times lpf xts English Release 2012 09 168 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 7 4 7 6 Loading of the last Minutes of the Data from a Storage Profile The Analyzing Script Load with Storage Profile Period of Time from the example location shows an example of how the last few minutes of the data from
135. ditor The icon of an X Tools Server which is running in safe mode indicates this special operating condition Icon Description Pg normal operation The X Tools Server is running normally ZA safe mode The X Tools Server is running in safe mode English Release 2012 09 109 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 18 4 X Tools Service In case the X Tools Server crashes or hangs it must be restarted by another application The X Tools Service takes over this task and must be enabled in order to enable the restart functionality In order to enable the re start through the X Tools Service choose Automatically restart the X Tools Server in case it stops to operate normally for the Automated Restart setting within the Global Options of the X Tools Server When it is enabled the X Too ls Service constantly monitors the X Tools Server and restarts it automatically in case of a detected crash or hung In addition the X Tools Service itself is monitored by Windows and Windows restarts the X Tools Service automatically in case it disappears In case the context menu of the X Tools Server from the task bar of Windows is not available for any reason and the X Tools Server must be stopped the X Tools Service must be stopped earlier via the Services dialog of Windows which is found in Start gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services If the X
136. dragged column is hidden Minimize and Maximize In order to minimize or maximize a table a double click with the left mouse button onto its title bar can be per formed Additionally the icon at the right border of the title bar of each table also can be used in order to mini mize and maximize the table English Release 2012 09 175 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 8 1 1 2 Trees Trees are being used mainly for the following main functionalities e Keyboard Operations Keyboard Operations visualization and selection purposes The trees of the X Tools Client provide Different keyboard operations are supported depending to whether the tree is in editing mode at the moment or not The following keyboard ope rations are provided in case the tree is not in editing mode Keyboard Operation Description lt Del gt performs a remove delete operation lt Ctrl gt lt C gt performs a copy operation lt Ctrl gt lt X gt performs a cut operation lt Ctrl gt lt V gt performs a paste operation lt Esc gt cancels the current selection lt F2 gt puts the item which owns the input focus currently into editing mode lt Tab gt jumps from the current tree to the next tree table menu bar lt Shift gt lt Tab gt jumps from the current tree to the previous tree table menu bar lt Cursor left gt onto an expanded tree item collaps
137. e Main item from the MMS Explorer can be dragged into the empty Global Options Editor in or der to start editing of the global options of the X Tools Client o Any of the present Main gt Servers gt YourServerName items from the MMS Explorer can be dragged into the empty Global Options Editor in order to start editing of the global options of the X Tools Server e Fora more detailed description of all available functionalities of the Global Options Editor refer to the reference manual of the Main Management System chapter Global Options Editor Functionality e The Global Option Settings table at the top of the Global Options Editor displays the general file infor mation and allows entering additional file attributes like a description and the name of the author of the file and his company e Within the Global Options table the values of all global options can be edited e The Save and Save As buttons are used in order to save the configured global options with all of their settings Each X Tools Client and each X Tools Server supports only one Global Options File thus the user does not need to provide a file name during saving o Incase the Global Options File is being stored to the local file system any possible performed changes of the contained global options are not being used by the X Tools Client or the X Tools Server The Global Options File must be stored to an X Tools Client or to an X Tools Serve
138. e Device Profiles and Interface Profiles a A a A T Figure 51 Example Use Case for the Sequence Control English Release 2012 09 110 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 19 3 Provided Analyzing Functions The following Analyzing Functions are being used for the execution of the sequence control Refer to the refer ence manual of the Analyzing System chapter Analyzing Functions for detailed information about each of these Analyzing Functions Start e allows to start a Configuration File an Interface Profile a Device Profile an Analyzing Model an Analyz ing Script or a Storage Profile e via the WaitMode parameter it can be configured whether Start shall wait until the specified Configura tion File has finished its operation or not o typically it does not make sense to wait for Interface Profiles and Device Profiles or for Analyzing Models Analyzing Scripts and Storage Profiles in case they are operating on online data o incase of Analyzing Models Analyzing Scripts and Storage Profiles which are operating on offline data it can make sense to wait until the execution e g the calculation or the storage has finished e the Start 01 Analyzing Script within the example location shows another example about how to use this Analyzing Function Pause e allows to pause a Configuration File an Interface Profile a Device Profile an Analyzing
139. e X Tools Server e After another Configuration File location has been added successfully the X Tools Server automatically creates all of the necessary sub directories In case the added Configuration File location contains some Configuration Files already the Configuration Files which are marked as to be started are being started automatically e The Add Location context menu item is available not only within the DMS Explorer but also within the MTS Explorer ANS Explorer and STS Explorer As Configuration File locations are valid system wide they can be added via any of the above explorer trees and they become available within all explorer trees in case they are added via one of them Try it out gt Add the SIPLUS CMS X Tools Server User Example Location directory as additional Configuration File location All of the Configuration Files from the example location become visible within the explorer trees of the X Tools Server gt Start the Interface Profile Simulation T001 from the example location The according simulated devices are being added to the DMS Explorer and are visible under the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Interfaces gt Simulation T001 gt Start a Device Profile from the example location for one of the devices which are being simulated The according data are being added to the MDS Explorer English Release 2012 09 49 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS
140. e data from the OPC UA server Ready At this point you know how to use the online data from standard OPC UA servers 6 23 Providing of Data to standard OPC UA Clients 6 23 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn how to use the built in OPC UA server of X Tools in order to provide all of the cur rent online data to standard OPC UA clients This chapter contains the following topics e Enabling of the built in OPC UA Server e Using of the built in OPC UA Server 6 23 2 Enabling of the built in OPC UA Server Open the MMS Explorer e Open the Main Management System and ensure that the MMS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Main Management System workspace Functionality e Within the Main Explorer expand the Main gt Servers branch e Click onto the item which represents your server with the right mouse button in order to open the context menu e Choose Edit Global Options from the context menu o A Global Options Editor with the current settings of your server opens automatically e Configure the setting Enable OPC UA Server to Yes in order to enable the built in OPC UA server e Configure the setting Port to the port which shall be used by the built in OPC UA server e Press the Save button from the menu in order to take over your changes o Changes of the used OPC UA port are taken over only at the start of the OPC UA server In order to change the port of an already running OPC UA server disabl
141. e default values and settings which are provided for a new Device Profile can be used for real meas urement already and without any modifications Depending to each measurement task a modification of the default values and settings may be necessary or not English Release 2012 09 56 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS e The Save and Save As buttons are used in order to save the configured Device Profile with all of its settings All saved Device Profiles are shown by the DMS Explorer Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Device Profile Files branch and can be accessed e g started stopped opened from there e Fora more detailed description of all available functionalities of the DPE ION AnalogInput T001 and the other Device Profile Editors refer to the reference manual of the Device Management System chapter Device Profile Editors Try it out gt Create a new Device Profile gt Change some names and descriptions within the Device Profile Data table gt Save the Device Profile At the first save the Save As dialog will pop up and offers a default file name Change the default file name to Hello Device Profile and press OK in order to save it to the disk The new Device Profile now is displayed below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Device Profile Files branch of the DMS Explorer gt Take a look
142. e for Monitoring Views with offline data as input it is much less likely that the error condition will disappear ever e a main use cases for Monitoring Views with offline data as input are sequential Analyzing Scripts see point 6 19 which could be blocked by a suspended Monitoring View without any benefit This chapter contains the following topics e Important Facts e Creation of a Monitoring View for automatic Reports e Trigger Examples e Example Configuration Files 6 25 2 Important Facts After the functionality of automatic reports has detected another event it waits the configured capture delay before the report is being created Thus the report is taken from the time ReportTime TimeOfTheTriggerE vent CaptureDelay the visible time interval within the report is from ReportTime back into the past The report always covers the time interval which is currently configured within the Monitoring View not Timeln terval CaptureDelay There is no other possibility to predefine the time interval which shall be captured by the automatic report thus in theory it also can be configured that the time of the actual event is not present within the report anymore Automatic reports through Monitoring Views are a pure thing of the X Tools Server The X Tools Client does not take part in the creation or handling of this kind of reports at all English Release 2012 09 122 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User M
143. e the OPC UA server first and change the to be used port and re enable the OPC UA server then Note Internally the OPC UA server connects to the rest of the X Tools Server like a standard client Therefore each enabling and disabling of the built in OPC UA server creates log entries about the attach and detach of a client and also increases or decreases the number of connected clients which is visible within the MMS Explorer Note The OPC UA server uses the user Anonymous in order to connect to the rest of the X Tools Server The only required access right is Read Access for the Online Data functionality Therefore all other access rights can be removed for the user Anonymous in case the X Tools Server must be protected against unauthorized ac cess English Release 2012 09 120 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Try it out Enable the built in OPC UA server Ready At this point you know how to enable and to disable the built in OPC UA server 6 23 3 Using of the built in OPC UA Server Functionality e After the built in OPC UA server has been enabled it can be accessed with standard OPC UA clients e In order to connect to the built in OPC UA server with a standard OPC UA client enter the IP of your PC and the configured OPC UA port within the according mask of your OPC UA client Try it out gt Use a standard OPC UA client in order to connect to the bui
144. e the first part leaves the last section again the first stop event occurs e In such a configuration there is no direct relation between the start and stop trigger any more and the Storage Profile must be configured accordingly in order to be able to produce the desired offline data files English Release 2012 09 171 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 7 4 8 2 Plant Simulation The Analyzing Script Plant is used in order to simulate a plant with all of the described behavior e A start event occurs each 30 seconds Thus the simulation acts as if another part would enter the plant each 30 seconds e The plant is separated into 5 sections Each section processes the part for about 15 seconds After the processing the part moves for about 5 seconds until it arrives at the next section Thus the total process ing time of each part is about 100 seconds o The simulation is decreasing a counter with a speed which is different in each section In a real plant like a rolling mill a similar measurement could be received from a temperature or thickness sensor o Within the simulated plant there are always 3 4 parts processed in parallel As a result the Storage Profile is also storing the current data to 3 4 offline data directories in parallel e The simulation uses the current time in seconds since 2012 01 01 as unique storage ID This value changes with each start event and is added to the na
145. e the online data Spectrum becomes available it may use the offline data Spec trum as input automatically The same task can be solved via an Analyzing Script also the following box shows the Analyzing Script 40 Monitor Spectrum Envelope from the example location var main the following Analyzing Scripts must be started before this one 20 Create Spectrum Envelope 30 Simulate Spectrum with Errors var Spectrum var SpectrumReady Spectrum InSpm Spectrum Default true SpectrumReady Control MonSpmEnv Spectrum SpectrumReady Spectrum Envelope UpperWarningBand Spectrum Envelope LowerWarningBand Spectrum Envelope UpperErrorBand Spectrum Envelope LowerErrorBand 0 0 true ControlUpper ControlLower Figure 74 Example of an Analyzing Script for the monitoring of the current online Spectrum The Analyzing Script 40 Monitor Spectrum Envelope explicitelly accesses the online data Spectrum thus it can be started any any point in time and won t start to perform calculations unless the simulated online data Spectrum appears within the MDS Explorer Whenever a violation of the specified envelopes is detected MonSpmEnv creates an according log entry 7 4 6 5 Example The offline data Analyzing Models and Analyzing Scripts from the example locations which are delivered to gether with X Tools can be used in order to reproduce the above
146. e time of the time server once after the time ser vice has been configured The manual synchronization avoids long lasting synchronization of the system time in case the difference between the system time and the time of the time server is big The following command line can be executed in order to change the current system time immediately to the time of the time server which is configured for the Windows time service e net time set yes The current time difference between the system time and the time of the time server can be visualized and tracked via the following command line e w32tm stripchart computer YourNTPServerName 7 2 4 Setup of a Computer which is Time Client and Time Server simultaneously In case the configured time server shall synchronize its time to a global time server like time windows com also the setup of a time client also must be applied at the computer which runs the time server In this case this computer acts as time server for the local time clients and in addition it is a time client which receives its time from e g time windows com The following table contains the registry keys which must be updated in order to setup up a computer to act as time server for other local computers and as time client e g to time microsoft com simultaneously The reg istry keys are found below HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services W32Time TimeProviders NtpServer Enabled
147. ead to more write operations at the hard disk For ex ample in case 20 MBytes would have to be stored per second an allocation size of 8 kByte would lead to 20 MBytes 16 kBytes 1280 write operations per second As typical access time of standard hard disks are at about 10 ms the system would loose 1280 10 ms 12 seconds of time only for the access time and this is obviously too much time when there is only one second available for the whole storing This detail must be considered in order to find the optimal setting for the Allocation Size Example e 2500 online data of type Decimal32 shall be acquired and stored e all 2500 online data are acquired with 100 Hz e the used computer has 4 GByte of RAM installed e during a test see above it could be detected that the creation of 2500 files needs about 15 seconds at the used PC Calculations e Ring Buffer Size o Incase 15 seconds are needed in order to create all needed files the ring buffer has to contain at least 30 seconds of data At a data rate of 100 Hz 100 values per second the ring buffer of each data must contain at least 100 30 3000 values o AmountOfMemory bytes 2500 3000 8 4 bytes 85 MBytes e Allocation Size o With the given framework we expect to store 2500 data 8 4 bytes 100 values per second 2 9 MBytes of data per second plus some additional bytes for header information o In order to be safe we want to achieve a
148. ed 7 4 5 2 Creation of X Y Envelopes In order to create an x y envelope the x and y input data must be available The following screenshots shows the visualization of an example x and y data This example data is delivered together with X Tools and can be loaded from the example offline files in addition the Monitoring View Example for XY Envelopes from the example location can be opened in order to receive the following visualization 1 x Offline Data with absolute Timestamps 2011 12 13 08 59 54 974 011 396 GMT 01 00 Cl L H Pk oote 10 gt E la Figure 65 Example of the Input Data for an X Y Envelope The Analyzing Function CalculateXY Envelope is being used for the actual calculation This Analyzing Function always calculates one upper and one lower band for the provided input data In case multiple upper and lower bands shall be monitored e g in case warning and an error bands are needed CalculateXYEnvelope must be called multiple times with different thresholds in order to calculate all needed envelopes English Release 2012 09 156 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS CalculatexYEnvelope must be used within a sequential Analyzing Script in order to perform the calculation The following box shows the Analyzing Script 20 Create XY Envelope from the example location which shows how CalculateXYEnvelope can be used var main
149. ed Storage Profile choose Start from the context menu o Multiple Storage Profiles can be running simultaneously and without any dependencies between each other e The stored data of each started Storage Profile is found at the specified data storage location From there the offline data can be loaded at any later point in time via the according Offline Data Loader e In order to stop a currently running Storage Profile call the context menu of this Storage Profile and choose Stop e There are several conditions in which a Storage Profile can not run after it has been started e g in case the source data is not available at the moment or in case the configured data storage location can not be accessed When a Storage Profile can not run after it has been started it is being suspended and auto matically resumed as soon as the error condition has disappeared e Incase at least one Storage Profile has been started by the user the status bar of the X Tools Client displays the current status of Storage Profiles via the according colored icon The tool tip of this icon pro vides detailed information about the number of currently started and suspended Storage Profiles o Note that the status bar always displays the status of exactly one X Tools Server thus also the icon for the current status of Storage Profiles displays the status of only the currently chosen X Tools Server Try it out gt Start an existing Storage Profile Ensure that
150. ed via the ANS Explorer o The current status of each Fast Analysis Script running or stopped is visible within the ANS Ex plorer o Incase a Fast Analysis Script would have to suspend the fast analysis is stopped with an error it won t resume o Incase any fast analysis finishes with success the Fast Analysis Status dialog is closed automati cally Contrary the Fast Analysis Status dialog remains open in case a fast analysis ends with an er ror Try it out gt Start a fast analysis for online data The output data which has been configured within the used Fast Analysis Script becomes available within the MDS Explorer and the Fast Analysis Status dialog is opened gt View the log entries which belong to the currently running analysis gt Cancel the currently running analysis The data which has been configured within the used Fast Analysis Script is being removed from the MDS Explorer and the Fast Analysis Status dialog is closed gt Start a fast analysis for offline data The output data which has been configured within the used Fast Analysis Script becomes available within the MDS Explorer and the Fast Analysis Status dialog is opened In case the offline calculation is per fomed only once the Fast Analysis Status dialog disappears automatically after the offline calculation has finished Ready At this point you know how to use existing Fast Analysis Scripts in order to start and stop the calculations based on
151. eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaas 21 Figure 2 Edition of the X Tools Server within the System Log Viewel cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaas 21 Figure 3 GUI of the Automation License Manager cccccccccccecicieee teenie eect enieee ee eceeeeeeieeeeenaeeeeesneeeesenieeeeeeaes 22 Figure 4 Start up Dialog of the Setup with the License Agreement cccccccceeceeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeseenneeeeeaas 23 Figure 5 Installation Options anere a Aen eee sees eee ve ed die ete 23 Figure 6 Advanced Installation Options ccccccccciecee ieee eee ee ee ennan EErEE eeee ee neee ee eaeeeeeeeaeeesenieeeeenieeeesnnaes 24 Figure 7 License Agreement Of Dire Ctx cect eect etter ee ee etie ee ee ene ee ee eeee ee taeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeseeneeeseeneeeeeeaes 24 Figure 8 Installation Progress Of Diri eeaeee srra Kaan AREARE ee ernie aAA E ERRETAN ARANARAK AEEA RETANA RENARE REAS 25 Figure 9 License Agreement of the Net Framework 2 0 sassssesssessssreseerrnsrinnsseernnarrnresnnnnaatenanstennaatennnennnnnaane 25 Figure 10 Installation Progress of the Net Framework 2 0 cccccccccscceecteeeeeenneeeeeenneeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeecaeeeeeeneeeeneas 26 Figure 11 Installation Progress of the Automation License M naQet cccccccceccseececeenneteeeenieteeeeneeeeeenneeeneaas 26 Figure 12 Installation progress of the X Tools Client and X TOOIS Server ee 27 Figure 13 Installation fINISHO 000 0 cece eet E ee rete eee eee AA 27
152. eeeeeeeteeeeetieeeenee 71 Opening of existing Loading Profiles 0 00 0 eceeeeeeeeee ee eeee ee ee ette ee ee teee ee teeeeeeteeeeetieeeeeeea 74 Starting and Stopping of Loading Profiles 2 0 0 0 eect eeeeee erent ee ee teee ee eeeeeeteeeeetaeeeeetaa 75 Advanced Loading of Offline Data eee eeeeneeeeeenneeeeeeaeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeaaeeeseecaeeeseenaeeeeseaas 75 Omne File Locations soroen aan aes ea ae anna eos 78 General DESCrPUON omiri e aa a sa azece hig ae aa aaa aA Aaaa hag Atectbsneeteeeaant 78 Adding olan Offline File Location nener a E E EEE R 78 Removing of an Offline File Location cc eeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeeaeeeeeesaeeesetnaeeeenenaeeeeeeaaes 79 Visualization of OMline Data 25 ss ne sachs dest cece eves t2ecdeg des akedsnnes a a teatede dep e a 79 General DeScription ssi tindin eee ed eee de adie RS Meee Stee 79 Visualization of offline Data rr see 0 cect erst EEE eee 80 Analyzing of Data via Analyzing Models cc ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeaeeeseeeaeeeeenaaeeeeneaaees 81 General Description cces cgeenesteetaateiiayi iii nea aie een aad ie i eee eal 81 Creation of a new Analyzing Model 0 ccccceececeeeeeeeee ee eecneee erence ee teeeee tees eetieeeeeeteeeeres 81 Opening of existing Analyzing Models ceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeetnneeeeeeneeeeetineeeeeetneeeersneeeee 84 Starting and Stopping of Analyzing Models ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeieeeeetieeeeeeneeee
153. ehaves like lt Enter gt English Release 2012 09 176 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 8 1 1 3 Menu Bars Menu bars are found at the bottom of most dialogs and provide the following main functionalities e Keyboard Operations Keyboard Operations The following keyboard operations are provided by each menu bar Keyboard Operation Description lt Esc gt behaves like if the Yes or OK button would have been clicked lt Enter gt behaves like if the No or Cancel button would have been clicked lt Cursor left gt moves the input focus from the current button to the next button at the left lt Cursor right gt moves the input focus from the current button to the next button at the right lt Cursor up gt moves the input focus from the current button to the next button at the left lt Cursor down gt moves the input focus from the current button to the next button at the right lt Tab gt moves the input focus from the current button to the next button at the right in case the rightmost button had the input focus already the input focus is being moved to the topmost control of the dialog lt Shift gt lt Tab gt moves the input focus from the current button to the next button at the left in case the leftmost button had the input focus already the input focus is being moved to the bottommost control
154. en configured within the started Analyzing Model becomes available within the MDS Explorer gt Create another new empty Analyzing Model English Release 2012 09 99 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS gt Drag amp Drop the User Function HelloW2 which has been created during the previous tutorial from the ANS Explorer into the AME Standard T001 gt Enter the name of an online data from the MDS Explorer for the In0 argument of HelloW2 and the name of another online data for the In1 argument gt Enter a name for the Out0 argument of HelloW2 gt The Analyzing Model looks like in the following example Analyzing Model Settings 5 Analyzing Model Parameters E Offline Time Configuration J Treatment of Status Codes ION Analoginput T001 CHO1 ION Analoginput T001 CHO2 oS HelloW2 Convert Close Figure 46 AME Standard T001 with the HelloW2 User Function gt Start the Analyzing Model The output data which has been configured within the started Analyzing Model becomes available within the MDS Explorer gt Compare the output of both Analyzing Models within the Monitoring System Both Analyzing Models produce identical output data gt Stop both Analyzing Models The data which have been configured within the started Analyzing Models are being removed from the MDS Explorer Ready At this point you know how to use a User Function within an
155. ened User Function ccccccccccceccecceeeeeeeeececneeceseeeeeseescnieeeeeeeeetees 98 AME Standard T001 with the HelloW User FUNCtION u ccccccceeceeeeeenneeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseneaeeetenaeeeeeeaaees 99 AME Standard T001 with the HelloW2 User FUNCTION ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeenneeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeneaas 100 ASE Standard T001 with the HelloW User Function ccccccccceeceeeeeteeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeseeneeeeneaas 101 ASE Standard T001 with the HelloW2 User Function cccccceeeeceeeeneeeeeeenneeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeseenaeeeeeeaas 102 SPE Binary T001 with a new Storage Profile 0 2 ccccecccccce ete ee enteee ee eteee ee eneee ee tieeeeetineeeeetneeeeeteae 106 MVE Standard T001 with a 3D Visualization 0 eeceeecceeeete ee eeeee ee teeeee ee teeeeeeeteeeaeeeteeeaeeeseneaeeeseeaaeees 108 Example Use Case for the Sequence Control ccccccccccceececceeceeeceeeeecceeaeceeeeeeesecsuaeeeeeeesesensiaeeess 110 Example for an Automatic Report cccccccccceeeeeeeccceeececeeeceecaaeceeeeeeeseccesaeceeeeeeesececccaeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeees 126 ASE Standard T001 with an opened Fast Analysis Script ccccccccccceeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeteeneeeeeeeeettees 130 Example of an Analyzing Model for a Frequency Analysis cccccccccccecccieeeeetnteeeeeenieeeeeenieeeeetneeeees 145 Example of the Input Signal for the Frequency ANnalySiS ccccccccccieceeeeiieeeeenneeeeeenieeeeeeieeeeetneeeees 146 Example of a Freque
156. ensed to use Microsoft Windows operating system software the software you may use this supplement You may not use it iF you do not have a license for the software You may use a copy of this supplement with each validly licensed copy of the software By clicking I accept the terms of the License Agreement and proceeding to use the product I indicate that I have read understood and agreed to the terms of the End User License Agreement Figure 9 License Agreement of the Net Framework 2 0 English Release 2012 09 25 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS iis Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 Setup Installing components Figure 10 Installation Progress of the Net Framework 2 0 Installing Siemens Automation License Manager The program features you selected are being installed Please wait while the InstallShield Wizard installs Siemens Automation License Manager This may take several minutes Status Copying new files InstallShield Figure 11 Installation Progress of the Automation License Manager English Release 2012 09 26 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 2 SIPLUS CMS4000 Setup Installation Progress toj ka Installation Status Installation Progress Installation Status DirectX redistributable files installation completed Installing NET 2 0 redistributable files NET 2 0 redistribut
157. ently running Device Profile for the simulated ION AnalogInput T001 The data which has been configured within the started Device Profile is being removed from the MDS Explorer Ready At this point you know how to start and stop existing Device Profiles in order to start and stop the measurement of data via a device English Release 2012 09 59 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 8 Visualization of Online Data and Monitoring Views 6 8 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn how to visualize online data from the MDS Explorer with the Monitoring System using the most basic functionalities and how to create and maintain Monitoring Views A Monitoring View con tains the exact configuration of the visualized curves including all settings It is used in order to save all relevant settings and to restore them with a single Drag amp Drop operation Examples of Monitoring Views are found within the example Configuration File location which is being delivered together with X Tools This chapter contains the following topics e Creation of a new Monitoring View e Opening of existing Monitoring Views e Starting and Stopping of Monitoring Views 6 8 2 Creation of a new Monitoring View Open the MTS Explorer e Open the Monitoring System and ensure that the MTS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Moni toring System workspace e Ensure that you have several data available below the
158. er e Open the Storage System and ensure that the STS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Storage System workspace Functionality e Method 1 for starting of the simple loading of offline data o Within the MDS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer branch o Click onto the present Offline Data branch with the right mouse button in order to open the context menu o In order to open the ODL Standard T001 choose Load Offline Data from the context menu The ODL Standard T001 is opened and its Offline Data Files tree automatically displays the available offline data file locations of the X Tools Server from which the context menu has been called e Method 2 for starting of the simple loading of offline data o Within the STS Explorer expand the Main gt Editors gt Offline Data Loaders branch o Drag the ODL Standard T001 with the left mouse into the empty space at the right side of the STS Explorer An empty ODL Standard T001 is opened automatically o Drag the X Tools Server whose data shall be loaded into the empty ODL Standard T001 The Offline Data Files tree automatically displays the available offline data file locations of the dropped X Tools Server e Method 3 for starting of the simple loading of offline data o Within the STS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Libraries gt Storage Process Modules branch o Click onto any of the present Storage Proce
159. er func tions e An Analyzing Script can work either only on online data only on offline data or on online and offline data simultaneously The class of the resulting data online or offline can be configured via the Analyzing Script Parameters table e Analyzing Functions from the category Input are being used in order to get online or offline data from the system into the Analyzing Script Analyzing Functions from the category Output are being used in order to put online or offline data from the Analyzing Script back to the system e The Save and Save As buttons are used in order to save the configured Analyzing Script with all of its settings All saved Analyzing Scripts are shown by the ANS Explorer Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Analyzing Script Files branch and can be accessed e g started stopped opened from there e In addition to the time slice based operating mode Analyzing Scripts also can be executed in sequential processing The sequential processing allows further operations like manipulating of time intervals and conditional statements within the Analyzing Script For a more detailed description of all available func tionalities of the ASE Standard T001 and of the available Analyzing Functions refer to the reference manual of the Analyzing System chapter ASE Standard T001 and chapter Analyzing Functions Try it out gt Create a new Analyzing S
160. ere is no X Tools Server connected at the moment all X Tools Server related operations e g configuring of measurement analysis and storage tasks or visualization of data are not available e In order to stop the currently running Main Profile call the context menu of this Main Profile and choose Stop o Incase the currently running Main Profile is being stopped all of the connections to X Tools Servers are terminated Try it out gt Start an existing Main Profile The connections to the X Tools Servers which are configured within the Main Profile are being estab lished in case the specified X Tools Servers are available The connected X Tools Servers appear within all explorer dialogs of the X Tools Client gt Stop the currently running Main Profile All connections to X Tools Servers are being terminated and all X Tools Servers disappear within all explorer dialogs of the X Tools Client Ready At this point you know how to start and stop existing Main Profiles in order to establish and terminate the con nections to X Tools Servers 6 3 5 Securing of the X Tools Server The X Tools Server provides a user accounts management which can be used in order to maintain multiple users which have different rights at the X Too s Server For example one user may be allowed to edit and start stop Configuration Files another one may be allowed to only start stop existing Configuration Files and a third one may be allowed only to
161. ers YourServerName Files Default Location Interface Profile Files right click with the mouse onto your saved Interface Profile choose Start After the Interface Profile has been started the X Tools Server attempts to connect to the configured devices Each successfully connected socket device appears with the DMS Explorer below Main Servers YourServerName Interfaces Socket T001 Each successfully connected IEEE 1394 device appears with the DMS Explorer below Main Servers YourServerName Interfaces IEEE1394 T001 Configure the currently connected devices in order to receive their measurement data a open the DMS Device Management System within the DMS Explorer expand Main Servers YourServerName Interfaces e g IEEE1394 T001 or Socket T001 right click with the mouse onto a connected device choose New Device Profile configure your desired settings for the data streaming press Save within the Device Profile Editor within the DMS Explorer expand Main Servers YourServerName Files Default Location Device Profile Files right click with the mouse onto your saved Device Profile choose Start After the Device Profile has been started the X Tools Server initializes the data streaming of the configured device The incoming data appears within the MDS Explorer below Main Servers YourServe
162. ervers gt YourServer gt Online Data gt All Online Data branch o Drag amp Drop the desired target data into the empty Monitoring System The MVE Standard T001 is opened automatically and also opens the proper Monitoring Chart In addition the dropped data is added to and visualized by the opened Monitoring Chart automatically o This method works only in case the target X Tools Server and the target data are present but it is more convenient and faster as it automatically opens all windows English Release 2012 09 60 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS e The following screenshot shows an example of a new Monitoring View Monitoring View Settings Monitoring View Parameters Figure 28 MVE Standard T001 with a new Monitoring View e The Monitoring View Settings table at the top of the MVE Standard T001 displays the general file infor mation and allows entering additional file attributes like a description and the name of the author of the file and his company e Within the Monitoring View Parameters table additional parameters like the Time Domain can be config ured e In order to visualize any of the currently available online data drag the desired data from the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Online Data branch of the MDS Explorer into an empty MVE Standard T001 or into an opened Monitoring Chart Up to 32 data can be put into one Monitoring Chart e Several
163. es Analyzing Scripts found in Analyzing Script Files Measurement Tasks Spectrum Envelopes Name Description This Analyzing Script creates all spectrum envelopes ouf of the previously loaded spec 20 Create Spectrum Envelope trum data This Analyzing Script simulates an online spectrum with small errors so that violations of 30 Simulate Spectrum with Errors the calculated envelopes take place 40 Monitor Spectrum Envelope This Analyzing Script monitors the online spectrum against the created spectrum enve lopes Monitoring Views found in Monitoring View Files Measurement Tasks Spectrum Envelopes Name Description This Monitoring View shows the original offline spectrum the calculated spectrum enve Visualize Spectrum Envelopes lopes the current online spectrum and the three outputs of MonSpmEnv Offline Data found in Example Offline Files X Tools Offline Data Files Measurement Tasks Spectrum Envelopes Name Description Spectrum The spectrum which has been generated via the Analyzing Model 10 Create Reference Spectrum English 166 182 Release 2012 09 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 7 4 7 Automatic loading of Data 7 4 7 1 General This chapter shows how to use the Analyzing System and the Analyzing Function LoadData in order to load offline data automatically from offline data files The different use cases for the loading of offline data f
164. es is to automatically load a certain period of time of some data The Analyzing Script Load Period of Time from the example location shows an example for this use case var main the location X Tools Offline Data Files must point to the following directory of the X Tools installation Server User Example Offline Files X Tools Offline Data Files var StartTime EndTime StartTime 1244110988 2009 06 04 12 23 09 EndTime 1244110994 2009 06 04 12 23 15 we load 6 seconds from the middle of this data LoadData X Tools Offline Data Files ION AnalogInput T001 ION AnalogInput T001 CHO1 Append Each Value Minimum Time and Maximum Time StartTime 0 EndTime English Release 2012 09 167 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 7 4 7 4 Loading with Loading Profiles and Loading Modes Loading Profiles and all of their contained filter functionality can be used in order to apply filters during the load ing of data The Analyzing Script Load with Loading Profile Loading Modes from the example location shows the result of loading with a Loading Profile which has loading modes configured var main the location X Tools Offline Data Files must point to the following directory of the X Tools installation Server User Example Offline Files X Tools Offline Data Files the following command loads data from the specified
165. es the tree item lt Cursor left gt onto a collapsed tree item moves to the parent item of the tree item lt Cursor right gt onto a collapsed tree item expands the tree item lt Cursor right gt onto an expanded tree item moves the input focus to the first item below the expanded tree item lt Cursor up gt moves the input focus to the next upper tree item without performing of any collapsing or expand ing lt Cursor down gt moves the input focus to the next lower tree item without performing of any collapsing or expand ing lt Backspace gt moves the input focus to the parent item of the current tree item without performing of any collaps ing or expanding lt Home gt moves the input focus to the topmost tree item lt End gt moves the input focus to the bottommost tree item The following keyboard operatio ns are provided in case the tree is in editing mode Keyboard Operation Description lt Del gt performs a remove operation lt Ctrl gt lt C gt performs a copy operation lt Ctrl gt lt X gt performs a cut operation lt Ctrl gt lt V gt performs a paste operation lt Esc gt discards the changed value and puts the cell which owns the input focus currently into not editing mode lt Enter gt takes over the changed value and puts the cell which owns the input focus currently into not editing mode lt Tab gt b
166. ess OK af terwards Microsoft Windows 7 is delivered with two versions of the basic IEEE1394 bus driver The so called new driver with advanced support for IEEE1394b devices and the so called legacy driver In case the new driver is in stalled and the IEEE1394 devices are not detected or operating properly the legacy driver must be installed The legacy driver also must be installed in case the used IEEE1394 host adapter uses an IEEE1394 1995 PHY In order to install the legacy driver the following steps must be performed e Open the Device Manager of Windows e Expand the IEEE 1394 Bus host controllers item e Call the context menu of your IEEE1394 host adapter and choose Update Driver Software e Select Browse my computer for driver software e Select Let me pick from a list of device driver on my computer and check the box before Show com patible hardware e Select 1394 OHCI Compliant Host Controller Legacy and click Next in order to install the legacy driver English Release 2012 09 137 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 7 2 Time Synchronization 7 2 1 General In case X Tools Server and X Tools Client are running on different computers it is strongly recommended to use time synchronization for the system times of these computers Without time synchronization the system times of the used computers may be different and as a r
167. esult the visualization within the Monitoring System also would be shifted into the past or into the future The easiest way to set up time synchronization on a Windows system is to use the built in w32time service In the following there is an example how to set up a Windows time server on a Windows XP machine and how to configure the client computers Prinzipially the same configurations are valid also for other operating systems like Windows Server 2003 and Windows 7 7 2 2 Setup a Windows XP Time Server In order to enable the time server functionality on a Windows XP machine it is only necessary to change and create some registry entries and to restart the Windows time service afterwards The following table contains the registry keys which must be updated in order to setup up the time server The registry keys are found below HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services W32Time Registry Key New Value Config AnnounceFlags 5 TimeProviders NtpServer Enabled 1 TimeProviders NtpServer InputProvider 1 The above values are examples which may be acceptable for a large range of applications In case more spe cific settings are needed detailed information about the exact meaning of each registry key is found within the documentation about the windows time service which is available directly from Microsoft 7 2 3 Setup a Windows XP Time Client In order to enable the time synchronization on a Windows XP machine as
168. evice Management System and ensure that the DMS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Device Management System workspace e Ensure that you have at least one ION AnaloglInput T001 simulated below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Interfaces gt Simulation T001 branch of the DMS Explorer Functionality e Within the DMS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Device Profile Files branch e Click onto any of the present Device Profiles with the right mouse button in order to open the context menu e In order to start the currently selected Device Profile choose Start from the context menu o Up to one Device Profile can be started at any time for each of the present devices of an X Tools Server In case a Device Profile is started already for a device and the user starts another one for the same device the currently running Device Profile is stopped automatically and the other Device Profile is being started afterwards o Incase there is no Device Profile being started at the moment for a certain device the device is not configured and does not deliver any measurement data to the X Tools Server e The configured data of each started Device Profile is found within the MDS Explorer below its Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Online Data gt All Online Data branch From there the data can be moved to all systems of X Tools for further processing via Drag
169. ext start of X Tools the missing Configuration File will not be started any more because X Tools obviously has no information about its contents e All Configuration Files can be edited also in case their source e g an interface a device or some data is not available Thus the full configuration of X Tools can be created and or edited also without a direct connection to the final application 6 3 Client to Server Connectivity 6 3 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn how the X Tools Client can connect to one or more X Tools Servers via the func tionality of Main Profiles As all data acquisition calculation and storage tasks are performed by the X Tools Server the X Tools Client must be connected to at least one X Tools Server in order to configure and exam ine measurement and analysis tasks The client server architecture of X Tools has been chosen in order to fulfill various requests like full remote configuration possibility or execution of the actual data acquisition calcu lation and storage tasks without a user interface and as Windows service A Main Profile contains all of the information which is needed in order to connect to one or more X Tools Serv ers This information includes the IP address and ports of the target X Tools Servers as well as the username and password which shall be used when connecting From the provided username and password the X Tools Server determines the access rights for the connected X
170. f Datt eccceccceeeee entree ee eeteee ee teeeeeteeeeetieeeeetneeeetena 142 English Release 2012 09 7 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 7 3 6 Memory Management arena arsta E AE A A AE age al ee AE 144 7 4 Measurement Tasks iii eeceedeetcn eee a eee a eet ae ee ae a 145 7 4 1 Frequency ANANSI Saa eea AEE EEA 145 7 4 1 1 General E E E E O E O E T eee nde 145 7 4 1 2 Analyzing Modalen aE A ea ae ene EA NT 145 7 4 1 3 EXA MPl cso aene A aet ena r a e A a a ae e a aain 146 7 4 2 Spectrum MOMIMMOMING eaea ana EEEE AN E REA 147 7 4 2 1 EE e E E E ae lie E eee a T A A 147 7 4 2 2 Analyzing Model e eea aeea Errian iacecebvadedech eliceccheeuigiecchendedeeh eagecenenieceaveiagecevens 147 7 4 2 3 EXAM EEEE EE A E A A E E A E E T 148 7 4 3 Order ANAIS S aaminin a Aaaa A e A a era aee ide A 150 7 4 3 1 EE E EPE A EEEE ce ode ae ee ee E E alia te E TAT 150 7 4 3 2 Analyzing M del cecc0sesie centred ces nenie ennnen eee aianei aa bao deb baile EE Aia Eiei nate 150 7 4 3 3 DE OA o E ETET TTE E T E E E A ee tee 152 7 4 4 sequence Gontroll ztia Eaa a eira a a CI raea Ta e ote A nA Sha ate 154 7 4 4 1 EEE e EEEE E E E E OE EE E EE ATY 154 7 4 4 2 Example notenna e i a ele el ee ea 154 7 4 5 XIN Envelopes minnena rales fe vesh ad Deka taers nde dowaet ede a mig A ea 156 74 5 1 GONE ral orrn sack epee rate aise tence Sits td ios tetera Sh ai eel OE caudal na 156 7 4 5 2 Creation of X Y Envelopes c
171. f the Stor age System workspace e Ensure that you have several data available below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Online Data gt All Online Data and Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Offline Data gt All Offline Data branches of the MDS Explorer Functionality e Method 1 for the creation of a new Analyzing Script o Within the ANS Explorer expand the Main gt Editors gt Analyzing Script Editors branch o Drag the ASE Standard T001 with the left mouse into the empty space at the right side of the ANS Explorer An empty ASE Standard T001 is opened automatically o Press the New button in order to create a new Analyzing Script The new Analyzing Script is displayed by the ASE Standard T001 with default values o This method works in all cases even in case there is no X Tools Server connected at the moment It can be used for the creation and configuration of Analyzing Scripts for cases where the target X Tools Server is not present at the moment e Method 2 for the creation of a new Analyzing Script o This method works only in case the ASE Standard T001 is defined as Default Editor for Functions within the Global Options Editor of the X Tools Client o Within the ANS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Libraries gt Analyzing Func tions branch o Expand also the Arithmetic branch and drag a below Analyzing Function e g the Abs Ana
172. file Files Measurement Tasks Loading of Data IFN AI Storage Profile Files Measurement Tasks Loading of Data IFN AI load the data from the specified time interval LoadData Measurement Tasks Loading of Data IFN Al spf xts wu A Overwrite wu A Each Value wu Load Latest Files English Release 2012 09 169 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 7 4 7 8 Loading of the last Files from a Storage Profile automatically The Analyzing Script Load with Storage Profile Latest Files automatic from the example location shows an example of how to load the last stored files from a certain Storage Profile automatically all the time while the Storage Profile is running and producing additional offline data var main the location Offline Files also must be used by the following Storage Profile Measurement Tasks Loading of Data IFN AI the following Configuration Files must be running Interface Profile Files Measurement Tasks Loading of Data Simulation T001 Device Profile Files Measurement Tasks Loading of Data IFN AI Storage Profile Files Measurement Tasks Loading of Data IFN AI while 1 with the following settings WaitForEDT comes back each 10 seconds thus LoadData also is being called once each 10 seconds Wait ForEDT 2000 01 01 00 00 00 10 load the data from the specified time interval LoadData Measuremen
173. file and applied during the loading of offline data English Release 2012 09 76 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Via the Loading Mode and Loading Parameters cells intelligent data reduction can be applied when the offline data is being loaded Via the Time Input Mode cell and its below cells the to be loaded time interval can be specified manually The OK button is used in order to start overwriting with the currently selected data according to the currently chosen settings o The Advanced Export context menu item can be used in order to call the Advanced Export dialog for the currently selected files directories Within the Advanced Export dialog various settings can be provided which are applied when the actual exporting of offline data is performed Incase a Loading Profile is specified via the Used Loading Profile cell the settings about to be included to be excluded and or desired time intervals and loading modes are read from the speci fied Loading Profile and applied during the exporting of offline data Via the Export Location and Export Path cells the target location and path for the to be created export files can be specified Via the Export File Type Timestamp Format and Decimal Precision cells the format of the informa tion within the to be created export files can be specified Via the Export Mode and Export Parameters cells intelligent data reduction can be ap
174. g 6 25 3 Creation of a Monitoring View for automatic Reports Open a Monitoring View e Open a Monitoring View and display data with at least two different Monitoring Charts for example one MTC yt T001 and one MTC yx T001 Functionality e Within the Automatic Reports Parameters table configure the desired width height and target location for the created automatic report files e Within the Automatic Reports Trigger table specify the name of the to be used trigger data and the condi tions at which the automatic reports shall be created e The Monitoring View monitors the configured trigger event and creates reports automatically after it has been started e Whenever the configured trigger condition becomes true the Monitoring View stores another report file to the specified target location Try it out gt Display some data within a Monitoring Chart gt Configure a trigger data and a trigger condition which is fulfilled from time to time gt Save the Monitoring View and start it gt After a report has been created verify that the saved report matches the status of the system at the mo ment at which the trigger condition became true Ready At this point you know how to configure Monitoring Views for the creation of automatic reports English Release 2012 09 123 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction 6 25 4 Trigger Examples SIPLUS CMS The following examples show how the Automatic Repor
175. gged between the PC which is running X Tools and the device which is running the OPC UA server In case the OPC UA server is running at the same PC as X Tools no additional Ethernet cable is needed Power Supply The device which is providing the OPC UA server must be powered on as specified by the manufacturer of the device In case the OPC UA server is running at the same PC as X Tools no additional power supply is needed Driver Installation There is no driver installation needed for OPC UA servers Instead OPC UA servers have to be announced manually to X Tools after they have been attached and before they can be used The Interface Profile Editor for the OPC UA interface see IPE OPC UA T001 must be used for the configuration of connections to OPC UA servers 4 2 7 How to connect OPC UA Clients to the PC Ethernet Cable In order to connect an OPC UA client to X Tools an Ethernet cable must be plugged between the PC which is running X Tools and the device which is running the OPC UA client In case the OPC UA client is running at the same PC as X Tools no additional Ethernet cable is needed Power Supply The device which is acting as OPC UA client must be powered on as specified by the manufacturer of the de vice In case the OPC UA client is running at the same PC as X Tools no additional power supply is needed Driver Installation There is no driver installation needed for OPC UA client From the point of view of X Tools
176. gory can be assigned to each User Function The category is used by the ANS Explorer in order to group together User Functions of the same category Within the UFE Standard T001 a User Function contains Analyzing and User functions and links like an Ana lyzing Model Outside the UFE Standard T001 a User Function can be used by Analyzing Models and Analyz ing Scripts like any of the standard Analyzing Functions Multiple User Functions can be maintained and or exe cuted within Analyzing Models and Analyzing Scripts simultaneously Examples of User Functions are found within the example Configuration File location which is being delivered together with X Tools This chapter contains the following topics e Creation of a new User Function e Opening of existing User Functions e Using of User Functions within Analyzing Models e Using of User Functions within Analyzing Scripts e Behavior of User Functions e Examples of User Functions 6 15 2 Creation of a new User Function Open the ANS Explorer e Open the Analyzing System and ensure that the ANS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Ana lyzing System workspace e Ensure that you have several data available below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Online Data gt All Online Data and Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Offline Data gt All Offline Data branches of the MDS Explorer Functionality e Method 1 for the creation of a new User Function
177. he Direct setup wizard guides you through installation of Direct Runtime Components Please read the following license agreement Press the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement You must accept the agreement to continue the setup MICROSOFT SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS a MICROSOFT DIRECTX END USER RUNTIME These license terms are an agreement between Microsoft Corporation or based on where you live one of its affiliates and you Please read them They apply to the software named above which includes the media on which you received it if any The terms also apply to any Microsoft updates don t accept the agreement Figure 7 License Agreement of DirectX English Release 2012 09 24 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS alling Microso ire Progress Please wait while Setup completes the following actions Ge gt Installing Components Searching for updated Direc Runtime Components and updating as necessary This may take a few minutes Copying files x3daudio1_1 dll Back Next Cancel Figure 8 Installation Progress of DirectX ii Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 Setup ioj x End User License Agreement End User License Agreement MICROSOFT SOFTWARE SUPPLEMENTAL LICENSE TERMS MICROSOFT NET FRAMEWORK 2 0 Microsoft Corporation or based on where you live one of its affiliates licenses this supplement to you IF you are lic
178. he Name cell of the last line e The Storage Mode and Storage Parameters cells of each to be stored data can be used in order to con figure the intervals in which the data shall be stored e The Save and Save As buttons are used in order to save the configured Storage Profile with all of its settings All saved Storage Profiles are shown by the STS Explorer Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Storage Profile Files branch and can be accessed e g started stopped opened from there e Fora more detailed description of all available functionalities of the SPE Binary T001 refer to the refer ence manual of the Storage System chapter SPE Binary T001 Try it out gt Create a new Storage Profile gt Specify the desired data storage location gt Change the file splitting interval to 1 minute gt Add some data names to the Data table Specify different storage modes for each of the to be stored data gt Save the Storage Profile At the first save the Save As dialog will pop up and offers a default file name Change the default file name to Hello Storage Profile for online Data and press OK in order to save it to the disk The new Storage Profile now is displayed below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Storage Profile Files branch of the STS Explorer gt Take a look onto the Storage Profiles which are provided via the example location
179. he System Log Viewer for the X Tools Client The log entries of the X Tools Client are displayed gt Change one or more of the available visualization filters Only the log entries which apply to the chosen filters are displayed gt Drag one of the currently connected X Tools Servers so that its log entries are being displayed in addi tion to the already displayed log entries of the X Tools Client The log entries of the X Tools Client and of the chosen X Tools Server are being displayed together gt Drag the X Tools Client so that its log entries replace all of the currently displayed log entries Only the log entries of the X Tools Client are displayed again Ready At this point you know how to open system log of the X Tools Client and of the X Tools Server English Release 2012 09 48 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 5 Configuration File Locations 6 5 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn how Configuration File locations can be used in order to switch the complete con figuration of an X Tools Server with only a few clicks from one configuration to another configuration Each Configuration File location contains a complete set of Interface Profiles Device Profiles Device Setups Monitoring Views Analyzing Models Analyzing Scripts Storage Profiles and Loading Profiles When a Configu ration File location is added to the X Tools Server all of the contained configurations t
180. he connections to X Tools Servers via Main Profiles e Configuration of the Global Options of the X Tools Client via the Global Options Editor e Viewing of the System Log of the X Tools Client via the System Log Viewer e Configuration of the Global Options of any connected X Tools Server via the Global Options Editor e Viewing of the System Log of any connected X Tools Server via the System Log Viewer e Configuration of the User Accounts of any connected X Tools Server via the User Accounts Editor e Viewing of the currently available items via the Main Management System Explorer o available Main Profile Editors o available Main Profile Files o connected X Tools Servers English Release 2012 09 16 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 3 1 2 4 DMS Device Management System e Management of the connections to devices IONs IFNs and CTNs via Interface Profiles e Configuration of the measurement tasks of each device via Device Profiles e Viewing of the currently available items via the Device Management System Explorer o available Interface Profile Editors o available Device Profile Editors o connected X Tools Servers for each connected X Tools Server the following information is available available Interface Profile Files available Device Profile Files available Device Setup Files available interfaces connected devices available device specific plug ins Device Process Modules 3 1 2 5 MT
181. he left side of the Ana lyzing System workspace e Ensure that you have several data available below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Online Data gt All Online Data and Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Offline Data gt All Offline Data branches of the MDS Explorer Functionality e Within the ANS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Analyzing Script Files branch e Click onto any of the present Analyzing Scripts with the right mouse button in order to open the context menu e In order to start the currently selected Analyzing Script choose Start from the context menu o Multiple Analyzing Scripts can be running simultaneously and without any dependencies between each other e The configured data of each started Analyzing Script is found within the MDS Explorer below its Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Online Data gt All Online Data in case of output data class Online Data or Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Offline Data gt All Offline Data in case of output data class Offline Data branch From there the data can be moved to all systems of X Tools for further processing via Drag amp Drop e In order to stop a currently running Analyzing Script call the context menu of this Analyzing Script and choose Stop e There are several conditions in which an Analyzing Script can not run after it has been s
182. he right mouse button in order to open the context menu e In order to start the currently selected Interface Profile choose Start from the context menu o Up to one Interface Profile can be started at any time for each of the present interfaces of an X Tools Server In case an Interface Profile is started already for an interface and the user starts another one for the same interface the currently running Interface Profile is stopped automatically and the other In terface Profile is being started afterwards o Incase there is no Interface Profile being started at the moment for a certain interface no devices from this interface are available to the X Tools Server The only exception to this rule is the IEEE1394 interface which detects the currently attached devices via Plug amp Play and does not need any accord ing Interface Profile e In order to stop a currently running Interface Profile call the context menu of this Interface Profile and choose Stop o Incase the currently running Interface Profile is being stopped all of its currently present devices are disconnected and not available to the X Tools Server any more e There are several conditions in which an Interface Profile can not run after it has been started e g in case the target interface is not available at the moment When an Interface Profile can not run after it has been started it is being suspended and automatically resumed as soon as the error condition has disap pe
183. hem via an IEEE1394 cable to any other already connected ION or IFN or to another free IEEE1394 port at the PC Note IEEE1394 allows any topology e g chain tree except a loop Up to 16 IEEE1394 devices can be connected in a chain In case more than 16 IEEE1394 devices have to be connected together a tree topology has to be cre ated Note Do not use multiple IEEE1394 host adapters simultaneously for connecting of IEEE1394 devices to a single PC Configurations with multiple used IEEE1394 host adapters are not supported by the system Note Microsoft Windows 7 is delivered with two versions of the basic IEEE1394 driver The so called new driver does not work together with all kinds of IEEE1394 host adapters because it does not support IEEE1394 1995 PHYs In case the IEEE1394 devices are not recognized properly by Microsoft Windows 7 consider to switch to the so called legacy driver See also point 7 1 4 Power Supply To use an JON or IFN you have to provide it with a 24 V DC power supply Driver Installation After connecting an IEEE1394 ION or IFN to its power supply and to the PC via IEEE1394 for the first time the Windows operating system automatically will detect a new hardware device To use it the corresponding SIPLUS CMS driver must be installed for it Whenever an IEEE1394 device is being attached to the PC for the first time the hardware wizard of Windows starts automatically and wants to ins
184. his point you know how to remove and delete Configuration File locations from the X Tools Server and from the disk 6 6 Simulated Devices and Interface Profiles 6 6 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn how to attach simulated devices to the X Tools Server via Interface Profiles for the Simulation interface Simulated devices are used in order to show how to use the system For X Tools there is no difference in the configuration or usage of data between simulated and real devices Thus all operations which are performed on simulated devices e g creation of Device Profiles recording of measurement data performing of analysis storage of data are done in exactly the same way with real devices and all function alities of X Tools can be tried out without any real hardware attached Examples of Interface Profiles are found within the example Configuration File location which is being delivered together with X Tools This chapter contains the following topics e Creation of a new Interface Profile for the Simulation Interface e Opening of existing Interface Profiles e Starting and Stopping of Interface Profiles English Release 2012 09 50 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 6 2 Creation of a new Interface Profile for the Simulation Interface Open the DMS Explorer e Open the Device Management System and ensure that the DMS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Device M
185. hoose Add Output Interface gt Move the functions around within the User Function gt Change the visualization of some functions e g turn on off the values of the input arguments or expand and collapse the function gt Within the User Function Properties table set a Full Name of HelloWorld a Short Name of HelloW and a Parent Category of Tutorial English Release 2012 09 95 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS gt The User Function looks like in the following example eS Provided Input Interfaces No FullName Short Name Unit D Default Value 1 Input Ind 1 data or values which shall be added 0 Ind Input Int 1 data or values which shall be added 0 E Int iS Provided Output Interfaces No Ful Nams Short Name Us Descritption Default Value Parent Function Parent ON n OutputO OutO receives the result of the substraction 0 Sub OutO Open fe As Convert Close Figure 42 UFE Standard T001 with the HelloW Example gt Save the User Function At the first save the Save As dialog will pop up and offers a default file name Change the default file name to Hello User Function and press OK in order to save it to the disk The new User Function now is displayed below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt User Function Files branch of the ANS Explorer gt Create another User Function This time a
186. ialog see point 8 2 5 8 2 3 Tool Tip In order to show the tool tip of the X Tools Server simply place the mouse cursor above the icon of the X Tools Server After a few moments the tool tip is being displayed automatically The tool tip provides basic information like the version of the X Tools Server and its current status SIPLUS CMS X Tools Server v 03 05 Status OK Figure 77 Example of a Tool Tip of the X Tools Server 8 2 4 Context Menu In order to call the context menu of the X Tools Server click onto the icon of the X Tools Server with the right mouse button The following context menu items are provided Context Menu Item Description Show X Tools Server Status opens the X Tools Server Status dialog see point 8 2 5 Configure X Tools Server Connec opens the X Tools Server Connectivity dialog see point 6 3 6 tivity Re initialize the X Tools Server re initializes the X Tools Server which terminates all modules and restarts them afterwards Exit terminates the X Tools Server English Release 2012 09 178 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 8 2 5 X Tools Server Status Dialog The X Tools Server Status dialog can be called from the context menu of the X Tools Server which is avail able from the task bar of Windows This dialog displays the current status of the X Tools Server as well as de tailed information about the version and about the used l
187. icense In case warnings or errors have been detected during the startup of the X Tools Server this information also is being displayed by the X Tools Server Status dialog As the X Tools Server does not provide any other user interface the X Tools Server Status dialog can be used in order to receive a short overview about the ongoing operations without the need to connect an X Tools Client X Tools Server Status i The X Tools Server reports the Following status Connected Clients 2 InterFace Profiles 1 running O suspended Device Profiles 1 running O suspended Monitoring Views O running O suspended Analyzing Models 1 running 0 suspended Analyzing Scripts O running O suspended Storage Profiles O running 0 suspended Command Port 1394 Data Port 1395 OPC UA Server enabled Connected Clients 0 Port 4841 Server SIPLUS CMS X Tools Server Version 03 05 Edition Professional Status OK Figure 78 X Tools Server Status Dialog 8 3 X Tools Tray 8 3 1 Overview The X Tools Tray application manages the tray icon of the X Tools Server In addition it provides the context menu of the tray icon and the X Tools Server Status and X Tools Server Connectivity dialogs The X Tools Tray is started automatically by different mechanisms and keeps running also in case the rest of X Tools does not run at the moment In case the X Tools Server is not present the task
188. ieeeeeteeeeeetineeeeeniaeeeentaa 58 Starting and Stopping of Device Profiles 0 eee entree ee eet reer ttieee eee tteeeee teaser taeeeeeeea 59 Visualization of Online Data and Monitoring Views ecccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeteeeeeeeeeaeeeteeenaees 60 General DESCHIPUOM P EAE tl ctteet ale bctisl al tant sbeten A obec ete cadecteaduay 60 Creation of a new Monitoring View cccccce eee ee enter ee enteeeeeenneeeeeeteeeee teases teeeestieeeeeee 60 Opening of existing Monitoring ViCWS c cece eeteee eee eeneee ee eieee ee teeeeeteeeeetiieeeeetieeeeneaa 63 Starting and Stopping of Monitoring ViCWS 0 cc eeeeeeeeneeee eee eeneeeeeenneeeeeteeeeetaeeeeetieeeeetea 64 Storage of online Data via Storage Profiles 2 0 0 0 eee ee eeeeeeeee entree eeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeeeaes 64 General DeScriptloniis steak sete acta a tet lad esl en a ae eee 64 Creation of a new Storage Profile for online Data eceeceeeee rennet erties ee teeeeetneeeeeeee 64 Opening of existing Storage Profiles 2 0 0 eee eeneee erent ee eee tiene ee tees ee eneeeeeteeeeetieeeeeeea 66 Starting and Stopping of Storage ProfileS eee cette eee ee ee eneee eee eeeeeeteeeeetnaeeeeeeea 68 Loading of Data and Loading Froles ecne aoine EE E EAA 69 General Descriptions i Keiner ea ea aara eaa Atlee eh ead 69 Simple Loading of Offline Data 0 0 eee e T iE 69 Creation of a new Loading Profile ceeeeceeeeeeeeeneee erent ee ee eteee eee eaeeee
189. ies gt Storage Process Modules branch o Click onto the present STE SPM Binary T001 with the right mouse button in order to open the context menu o In order to create a new Storage Profile for the storage format Binary T001 choose New Storage Profile from the context menu o This method works only in case the target X Tools Server is present but it is more convenient and faster as it automatically also determines the target X Tools Server of the new Storage Profile e Method 3 for the creation of a new Storage Profile o Within the MDS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Offline Data gt All Offline Data branch o Drag amp Drop the desired target data into the empty Storage System The SPE Binary T001 is opened automatically a new Storage Profile is being initialized with default values and the dropped data is added to Data table As offline data is being dropped the Time Domain cell within the Storage Profile Parameters table is being set to Offline Data with absolute Timestamps or Offline data with relative Timestamps automatically o This method works only in case the target X Tools Server and the target data are present but it is more convenient and faster as it automatically opens all windows e The following screenshot shows an example of a new Storage Profile a Storage Profile Settings S S Storage Profile Parameters Path and File Name Configu
190. iles are handled by the following chapters The Analyzing Scripts and Loading Profiles from this chapter can be tried out because the to be loaded data the Analyzing Scripts and the Loading Profiles are delivered together with X Tools The to be loaded data is found within the Server User Example Offline Files X Tools Offline Data Files path of the X Tools installa tion whereas the used Analyzing Scripts and Loading Profiles are part of the example location which is deliv ered together with X Tools The Measurement Tasks Loading of Data subdirectory of each Configuration File type contains the Configuration Files to which the following descriptions refer see also point 7 4 7 5 7 4 7 2 Basic loading of offline Data The most simple usage of LoadData is to load all files from a certain directory and all of its sub directories The Analyzing Script Basic Loading from the example location shows an example for this use case var main the location X Tools Offline Data Files must point to the following directory of the X Tools installation Server User Example Offline Files X Tools Offline Data Files the following command loads all offline data from the specified directory and all of its sub directories LoadData X Tools Offline Data Files ION AnalogInput T001 7 4 7 3 Loading of offline Data Files from a certain Period of Time Another use case for the loading of offline data fil
191. imultane ously where each logged in user has his own Windows session In case the X Tools Server has been started by the X Tools Service it is running in session 0 When the X Tools Server has been started through the X Tools Service it keeps running even in case the user logs off from session 0 because session 0 is never closed Session 0 is the local console of Windows Server 2003 It can be reached by logging in to the machine via its local keyboard or by using of the admin or console command line parameter of Remote Desktop English Release 2012 09 136 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Note By default hardware acceleration for the visualization of graphics is disabled for Windows Server 2003 In order to enable this hardware acceleration open the Display Properties dialog of Windows switch to the Settings tab and click onto the Advanced button Switch to the Troubleshoot tab and move the slider to Full before you apply your changes via pressing of the OK button After DirectX has been installed through the setup dxdiag exe must be started from the DirectX installation directory Switch to the Display tab and configure DirectDraw Acceleration Direct3D Acceleration and AGP Texture Acceleration all to Enabled 7 1 4 Microsoft Windows 7 Only one user can be logged in at Microsoft Windows 7 at any time Mult
192. ing Fast Analysis Scripts Open the ANS Explorer e Open the Analyzing System and ensure that the ANS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Ana lyzing System workspace Functionality e Within the ANS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Analyzing Script Files branch YourLocation must be a location of type Fast Analysis e Drag one of the below Fast Analysis Scripts with the left mouse into the empty space at the right side of the ANS Explorer An Analyzing Script Editor of proper type is opened automatically and displays the dropped Fast Analysis Script English Release 2012 09 129 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Analyzing Script Settings 35 Analyzing Script Parameters EJ Offline Time Configuration J Treatment of Status Codes var main check whether the caller has specified exactly 2 input data f f in case he did not this Fast Analyzing Script will stop here ChkNoP 2 J f f calculate the sum of the chosen input data Fast Add Add _ INPUT_DATA_1 _ INPUT _DATA_2 Line 4 Column 8 E Log Entries New Save s Figure 53 ASE Standard T001 with an opened Fast Analysis Script e The opened Fast Analysis Script can be edited now After editing the Save and Save As buttons are used in order to save the edited Fast Analysis Script with all of its settings Try it out gt Open an e
193. ing of an existing User Function o Within the ANS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Libraries gt User Functions branch o Call the context menu for one of the below User Functions and choose Edit A User Function Editor of proper type is opened automatically and displays the selected User Function User Function Settings User Function Parameters Open Save Save As Convert Close Figure 44 UFE Standard T001 with an opened User Function e The opened User Function can be edited now After editing the Save and Save As buttons are used in order to save the edited User Function with all of its settings Try it out gt Open an existing User Function gt Enter another storage location and change the Model Description within the User Function Settings table Add an additional function to the User Function and output also this additional result of the calculation gt Save the User Function via the Save button The modified User Function is still displayed below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt User Function Files branch of the ANS Explorer Ready At this point you know how to open and modify an existing User Function English Release 2012 09 98 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 15 4 Using of User Functions within Analyzing Models Provide some online Data e Ensure that there is some onli
194. ing of online data also storing of online data via the Storage System and loading of offline data can need a significant amount of working memory In case of very memory intensive appli cations these three components may have to be adjusted to each other in order to achieve best results The X Tools Server refuses to allocate additional working memory in case there is not enough physical RAM not page file left because the page file can cause extensive access to the hard disk and a high page file usage would slow down all other operations significantly Thus increasing of the page file does not make more working memory available for the X Tools Server English Release 2012 09 141 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 7 3 3 Allocation Size The Allocation Size specifies the size of the buffers which are being written to the hard disk during the storing Bigger buffers require more working memory and achieve better writing performance whereas smaller buffers require less working memory but also have a significant worse writing performance The amount of bytes within the working memory which are needed in order to store a given number of data is roughly calculated as follows e AmountOfMemory bytes 2 buffers NumberOfData 1 AllocationSize bytes e 2 buffers are needed because there is always one buffer being filled while the other one is written to the disk Example e 100 online data shall be store
195. ion modes or it may not be able to work together with all output data classes e Before a User Function can be saved the Full Name and Short Name of the User Function must be specified within the User Function Properties table e The Save and Save As buttons are used in order to save the configured User Function with all of its settings All saved User Functions are shown by the ANS Explorer Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt User Function Files branch and can be accessed from there In addition each User Function also creates one entry below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Libraries gt User Functions branch of the ANS Explorer e Fora more detailed description of all available functionalities of the UFE Standard T001 and of the avail able Analyzing Functions refer to the reference manual of the Analyzing System chapter UFE Stan dard T001 and chapter Analyzing Functions Try it out gt Create a new User Function gt Build an easy User Function which adds two data together and subtracts a value of 10 from the result gt This User Function needs only two Analyzing Functions Add and Sub In order to provide the external interface the two inputs of Add are configured as input interfaces call the context menu for each input and choose Add Input Interface and the output of Sub is configured as output interface call the context menu for the output and c
196. iple Windows sessions can be present simultaneously but there can be only one user working with the system at any time In case the X Tools Server has been started by the X Tools Service it is running in session 0 In case of Win dows 7 session 0 is reserved for the system and no user can log in to this session In order to allow the system to start the X Tools Server automatically the UAC User Accounts Control prompt must be disabled The following steps can be performed in order to disable the UAC prompt e Open Control Panel gt User Accounts e Choose Change User Account Control settings e Configure the setting to Never notify and press OK In case the UAC prompt is not disabled it will pop up whenever the X Tools Server should be started automati cally In this case the X Tools Server won t be started until a user logs in to the computer and acknowledges the UAC prompt manually Note By default all notification icons of applications are hidden in Windows 7 when they are inactive This applies also to the task tray icon which is provided through the X Tools Tray application In case the task tray icon of the X Tools Tray application shall be visible permanently press the Show hidden Icons button from the task bar of Windows and press Customize Within the upcoming dialog the behavior of the task tray icon of the X Tools Tray can be configured to any of the available settings and pr
197. isualizations can not be moved because they always dis play the current time at their right border English Release 2012 09 61 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Via the tool bar in the right corner of each Monitoring Chart basic functionalities are available o the cursors can be turned on off o the last zooming shifting and scrolling operations can be undone redone o the visualization can be paused continued Additional Monitoring Charts can be dragged from the MTS Explorer and can be placed into the opened Monitoring View Data from the MDS Explorer can be put into the additional Monitoring Charts like they can be put into the first opened Monitoring Chart and the present Monitoring Charts can be arranged within their Monitoring View like the other windows can be arranged within X Tools The Save and Save As buttons are used in order to save the configured Monitoring View with all of its settings All saved Monitoring Views are shown by the MTS Explorer Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Monitoring View Files branch and can be accessed e g opened from there For a more detailed description of all available functionalities of Monitoring View Editors and Monitor ing Charts refer to the reference manual of the Monitoring System chapter Monitoring View Editors and chapter Monitoring Charts Try it out gt gt gt gt gt
198. l Configuration File locations 6 2 X Tools Basics 6 2 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn more about the basic modules and functionalities of X Tools This chapter contains the following topics e Running X Tools for the first Time e X Tools User Interface e Available Data 6 2 2 Running X Tools for the first Time Start X Tools e To start X Tools double click the X Tools shortcut on your desktop Alternatively you can directly call X Tools Client exe from the following directory SIPLUS CMS X Tools Client System Bin System Paths e At the first startup X Tools automatically generates the default configuration of all settings options and paths By default the started X Tools Client automatically also starts the X Tools Server and estab lishes the connection so that no additional configuration is needed and the actual measurement tasks can be started immediately e Via the Global Options Editor you are able to modify any of the default settings options and paths of the X Tools Client and of the X Tools Server at any later time Take a look at point 6 4 2 in order to re ceive detailed information about the Global Options Editor and its functionalities Ready At this point the basic configuration of X Tools has been finished and X Tools is ready to use English Release 2012 09 36 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 2 3 X Tools User Interface Sub
199. l SIMATIC automation controllers These software IONs can be added to the application program of the automation controller and can be used in order to transmit any of the internal variables of the controller to X Tools 4 2 2 Communication Interfaces IEEE1394 IONs and IFNs communicate with X Tools via IEEE1394 Examples for IEEE1394 IONs and IFNs are e IFN ANALOGINPUT e IFN VIB ACC e ION Analoginput T001 e ION Binarylnput T001 e ION PROFIBUS DP Spy T001 e ION VIB A T001 e ION VIB D T001 Ethernet IONs communicate with X Tools via Ethernet Examples for Ethernet IONs are e ION SIMATIC S7 300 T001 e ION SIMATIC S7 400 T001 e ION SIMATIC S7 PN e ION SIMATIC TDC T001 e ION SIMOTION T001 Serial port CTNs communicate with X Tools via the serial port Examples for serial port CTNs are e CTN WatchGuard T001 OPC UA servers can be accessed by X Tools in its role as OPC UA client OPC UA servers appear within X Tools as devices of type e OPC UA T001 X Tools can act as OPC UA server In this role it can be accessed by other OPC UA client applications in order to read the current online data values from X Tools English Release 2012 09 31 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 4 2 3 How to connect IEEE1394 Devices to the PC IEEE1394 Cable In order to connect an IEEE1394 JON or IFN to X Tools an IEEE1394 cable must be plugged between the used PC and the ION or IFN To connect further JONs or IFNs connect t
200. l cover exactly the same time interval from the same start time until the same stop time as the original x and y input data the TimeStampMode parameter must be set to End with Input Data Time and the Timelnterval must be calculated with the following formula e TimelntervalForConvB1DToTS TimelntervalOfXandY DimensionOfClcXYEnv For our input data and Analyzing Script this calculation delivers the following result e TimelntervalForConvB1DToTS 30 s 1024 0 029296875 English Release 2012 09 158 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS However when the output of ConvertBuffer1 DToTimeSeries is needed only for the visualization it does not matter whether the time intervals of the original x and y data and of the output of Convert Buffer1DToTimeSeries have any relation to each other in this case the above script can be shorter because also the default values of ConvertBuffer1 DToTimeSeries are fully OK var main the following Analyzing Script must be started before this one 20 Create XY Envelope convert the x buffer of the warning bands to a time series ConvB1DToTS XY Envel XY Envel convert the upper ConvB1DToTS XY Envel XY Envel convert the lower ConvB1DToTS XY Envel XY Envel ope XBufferWarning ope XBufferWarningTS warning band to a time series ope UpperWarningBand ope UpperWarningBandTS war
201. le opens automatically e Within the Connections table enter the name or IP of the target OPC UA server into the Target IP or Name field and its port into the Port field e Configure the values for Server Certificate Security Policy Message Security User Name and Password to the values which are required for the successful acces to your OPC UA server e Incase there is no OPC UA client certificate present at the X Tools Server yet use the OPC UA Client Certificate table in order to create a new OPC UA client certificate simply call the context menu from the title bar of the OPC UA Client Certificate table or click into any of the present Value fields e Save the new Interface Profile e Start the new Interface Profile o The configured OPC UA server appears within the DMS Explorer below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Interfaces gt OPC UA T001 branch e Fora more detailed description of all available functionalities of the IPE OPC UA T001 refer to the refer ence manual of the Device Management System chapter IPE OPC UA T001 Try it out gt Create a new Interface Profile in order to connect to an existing OPC UA server gt Start the new Interface Profile The configured OPC UA server becomes present within the DMS Explorer English Release 2012 09 118 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Ready At this point you know how to connect to standard OPC UA server
202. ls Server and or the target de vice are not present at the moment English Release 2012 09 55 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS e Method 2 for the creation of a new Device Profile o Within the DMS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Interfaces gt Simulation T001 branch o Click onto a present ION Analog nput T001 with the right mouse button in order to open the context menu o Inorder to create a new Device Profile for the currently selected device choose New Device Profile from the context menu o This method works only in case the target X Tools Server and the target device are present but it is more convenient and faster as it automatically also determines the target X Tools Server and the tar get device of the new Device Profile e The following screenshot shows an example of a new Device Profile Device Profile Settings Device Profile Data No Enabled Name Unk Description D Destination Type Normalization Mode Normalization Parameters CHO1 Decimal32 x0 yO x1 x x0 0 000 y0 0 000 x1 1 000 y1 1 000 Each Value CHO2 Decimal32 x0 yO x1 x x0 0 000 y0 0 000 x1 1 000 y1 1 000 Each Value CHO3 Decimal32 0 y0 x1 v f x0 0 000 y0 0 000 x1 1 000 y1 1 000 Each Value CHO4 Decimal32 x0 y0 x1 x0 0 000 y0 0 000 x1 1 000 y1 1 000 Each Value CHOS Decimal32 x0 yO x1 x0 0 000 y0 0 000 x1 1 000 y1 1 000 Each Value
203. lt in OPC UA server gt Read values from different online data of X Tools via the connected OPC UA client Ready At this point you know how to provide the online data of X Tools to standard OPC UA clients 6 24 Creation of Screenshots out of the Monitoring System 6 24 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn how to print and save a screenshot of the data which is currently being visualized by the Monitoring System This chapter contains the following topics e Printing of Screenshots e Saving of Screenshots 6 24 2 Printing of Screenshots Open a Monitoring View e Open a Monitoring View and display data with at least two different Monitoring Charts for example one MTC yt T001 and one MTC yx T001 Functionality e Call the context menu from the Curve Area of any present Monitoring Chart and choose Print Screenshot e The standard Print dialog of Windows opens and allows to choose which printer and which settings shall be used for the printout Try it out gt Display some data within a Monitoring Chart gt Print a screenshot of the displayed data gt After the screenshot has been printed verify that the printout matches the original Monitoring View Ready At this point you know how to use the screenshot functionality in order to print the appearing of the currently visualized Monitoring View English Release 2012 09 121 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 24 3 Saving
204. lyzing Function into the empty Analyzing System workspace An ASE Standard T001 with a default Ana lyzing Script which also contains the dropped Analyzing Function is opened automatically o Instead of an Analyzing Function from the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Libraries gt Analyzing Functions branch also a User Function from the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Libraries gt User Functions branch can be dragged into the empty Analyzing System o This method works only in case the target X Tools Server is present but it is more convenient and faster as it automatically also determines the target X Tools Server of the new Analyzing Script English Release 2012 09 87 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction Analyzing Script Settings 5 Analyzing Script Parameters 7 E Offline Time Configuration Treatment of Status Codes var maini Line 3 Column 5 English Release 2012 09 SIPLUS CMS Method 3 for the creation of a new Analyzing Script o This method works only in case the ASE Standard T001 is defined as Default Editor for Functions within the Global Options Editor o Within the MDS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Online Data or the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Offline Data branch o Drag an online or offline data from the MDS Explorer into the empty Analyzing System workspace An ASE Stand
205. m Envelopes The same task can be solved via an Analyzing Script also the following box shows the Analyzing Script 20 Create Spectrum Envelope from the example location var main the following offline data must be loaded Spectrum var Spectrum var SpectrumReady Spectrum InSpm Spectrum Default true SpectrumReady UpperWarningBand SpmAdd Spectrum SpectrumReady Absolute Value 1 LowerWarningBand SpmAdd Spectrum SpectrumReady Absolute Value 1 j UpperErrorBand SpmAdd Spectrum SpectrumReady Absolute Value 2 LowerErrorBand SpmAdd Spectrum SpectrumReady Absolute Value 2 The created envelopes can be stored Afterwards they can be loaded at any time in order to use them together with the Analyzing Function MonitorSpectrumEnvelope for the monitoring of the current spectrum against the calculated envelopes English Release 2012 09 163 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 7 4 6 3 Visualization of Spectrum Envelopes The output of SpectrumAdd is a spectrum again and can be used directly for the visualization within the MTC yn T001 The following screenshots shows the visualization of the example spectrum together with the calcu lated envelopes 1 Offline Data with absolute Timestamps 5 Spectrum Envelope UpperErrorBand Spectrum Envelope UpperWarningBand Spectrum Spectrum Envelope L
206. me of each created directory e A stop event occurs each 30 seconds After the start of the Analyzing Script the first stop event occurs 100 seconds after the first start event this is due to the fact that the first processed part must go through the whole plant first before it can cause a stop event The Monitoring View Plant Online can be used in order to visualize all of the data from the simulated plant The following screenshot shows an example from this Monitoring View All Sections MTC yt TOO1 Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Ab 55 0 00 55 20 20 Peal 40 56 00 on 08 3 R 54 01 EN 2i 2012 08 31 re By 01 m at GMT 02 aD Figure 76 Example of the Plant Simulation for the advanced parallel storing 7 4 8 3 Storage Profile The Storage Profile Plant is used in order to store all data from the simulated plant e Anew offline data directory is created whenever the start event occurs e About 100 seconds of data are written to each offline data directory before the storing is ended through the matching stop trigger The Storage Profile can be started and stopped at any moment in time The most important settings for this behavior of the Storage Profile are e Storage Profile Parameters table o Parallel Storage Start a parallel Storage whenever another Start Event occurs e Stop Event table o Minimal St
207. menu o In order to open the ODL Standard T001 choose Load Offline Data from the context menu The ODL Standard T001 is opened and its Offline Data Files tree automatically displays the available offline data file locations of the X Tools Server from which the context menu has been called e Method 2 for starting of the advanced loading of offline data o Within the STS Explorer expand the Main gt Editors gt Offline Data Loaders branch o Drag the ODL Standard T001 with the left mouse into the empty space at the right side of the STS Explorer An empty ODL Standard T001 is opened automatically o Drag the X Tools Server whose data shall be loaded into the empty ODL Standard T001 The Offline Data Files tree automatically displays the available offline data file locations of the dropped X Tools Server e Method 3 for starting of the advanced loading of offline data o Within the STS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Libraries gt Storage Process Modules branch o Click onto the present STE SPM Binary T001 with the right mouse button in order to open the context menu o In order to open the SPE Binary T001 choose Load Offline Data from the context menu The ODL Standard T001 is opened and its Offline Data Files tree automatically displays the available offline data file locations of the X Tools Server from which the context menu has been called English Release 2012 09 75 182 SIPLUS C
208. mes and the description as well as the parent category of the User Function Within the Provided Input Interfaces table all of the input interfaces which are defined for the User Func tion are being displayed and can be edited Within the Provided Output Interfaces table all of the output interfaces which are defined for the User Function are being displayed and can be edited In order to add input data to the User Function simply drag the desired data from the MDS Explorer into the User Function In order to add Analyzing Functions to the User Function simply drag the desired Analyzing Function from the ANS Explorer into the User Function In order to add User Functions to the User Function simply drag the desired User Function from the ANS Explorer into the User Function Analyzing and User functions can be connected together via links Each output of a function can be con nected to one or more inputs of functions by clicking onto the output argument first and by clicking onto the input argument next Each created link transports the output value from its source function to the input argument of its destination function All of the currently present functions can be arranged within the User Function via Drag amp Drop English Release 2012 09 94 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS e A double click onto a function opens the Analyzing Function Properties dialog which can be used in or der to s
209. mmand Port 1394 Data Port 1395 k Cancel Figure 23 X Tools Server Connectivity dialog 6 4 Global Configurations 6 4 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn how to configure the global options of X Tools how to configure the user accounts of X Tools Servers and how to visualize the system log files of X Tools This chapter contains the following topics e The Global Options Editor e The User Accounts Editor e The System Log Viewer English Release 2012 09 45 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 4 2 The Global Options Editor Open the Global Options Editor e Open the Main Management System and ensure that the MMS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Main Management System workspace e In order to open the Global Options Editor for the X Tools Client call the context menu for the Main item within the MMS Explorer and choose Edit Global Options e In order to open the Global Options Editor for a connected X Tools Server call the context menu for the Main gt Servers gt YourServerName item within the MMS Explorer and choose Edit Global Op tions e The Global Options Editor also can be opened via the Global Options Editor button from the menu bar of the Main Management System workspace In this case the last time called Global Options Editor for the X Tools Client or for the connected X Tools Server is being opened automatically o Th
210. monitors the online x and y data against the created x y envelopes Analyzing Scripts found in Analyzing Script Files Measurement Tasks XY Envelopes Name Description 20 Create XY Envelope This Analyzing Script creates all x y envelopes out of the previously loaded x and y offline data 30 Prepare Visualization of XY Envelope This Analyzing Script converts the created x y envelopes from a 1 dimensional buffer into a time series This step is needed only in case the created x y envelopes shall be moni tored via the Monitoring System 40 Simulate x and y Data with Errors This Analyzing Script simulates online x and y data with small errors so that violations of the calculated envelopes take place 50 Monitor XY Envelope This Analyzing Script monitors the online x and y data against the created x y envelopes Monitoring Views found in Monitoring View Files Measurement Tasks XY Envelopes Name Description Visualize XY Envelopes This Monitoring View shows the original x and y offline data the calculated x y envelopes the current x and y online data and the three outputs of MonXYEnv English Release 2012 09 161 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Offline Data found in Example Offline Files X Tools Offline Data Files Measurement Tasks XY Envelopes Name Description x The x data which has been generated via the Analyzing Model 10 Create Reference x and y Data
211. must be started 7 4 6 2 Creation of Spectrum Envelopes In order to create a spectrum envelope the input spectrum must be available The following screenshots shows the visualization of an example spectrum This example data is delivered together with X Tools and can be loaded from the example offline files in addition the Monitoring View Example for Spectrum Envelopes from the example location can be opened in order to receive the following visualization Monitoring Chart 01 MTC yn TOOL 1 Offline Data with absolute Timestamps 2011 12 13 17 36 43 500 000 000 GMT 01 00 5 Spectrum Hk otl oo gt al id Figure 70 Example of the Input Data for a Spectrum Envelope The Analyzing Function SpectrumAddition can be used in order to add an absolute or a relative value to each amplitude of the spectrum In case multiple envelopes shall be monitored e g warning and error bands above and below the reference spectrum SpectrumAddition must be called multiple times with different thresholds in order to calculate all needed envelopes English Release 2012 09 162 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS The following screenshot shows the Analyzing Model 20 Create Spectrum Envelope from the example location which creates four envelopes out of the reference spectrum Figure 71 Example of an Analyzing Model for the Creation of Spectru
212. n average of not more than 50 write operations to the hard disk per second 2 9 MBytes 50 59 kBytes the next higher available Allocation Size is 64 kBytes o AmountOfMemory bytes 2 2500 64 kBytes 313 MBytes e Summary o We need at least 85 MBytes for the online data and 313 MBytes for the storing of this framework Higher values are suggested both for the ring buffer size and for the allocation size in case it is possi ble in respect to the rest of the system The higher these values are the more reserves are available for the X Tools Server however too high values will consume more than the available amount of physical memory which suspends the affected Configuration Files English Release 2012 09 143 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 7 3 6 Memory Management The X Tools Server constantly monitors the memory which is available within the whole system In case the total memory usage of the system is too high the X Tools Server automatically starts to suspend its currently running Configuration Files in order to give memory back to the system This is being done in order to avoid that Windows starts to swap the data buffers of the X Tools Server to the hard disk because if this swapping would be done the access reading and writing times to the data buffers could increase drastically and the behavior of the X Tools Server could become unstable Only the amount of physically i
213. n is opened within a UFE Standard T001 In order to become able to use the new User Function valid information must be provided for the full name and short name of the User Function and the input and output interfaces must be defined Release 2012 09 93 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS The following screenshot shows an example of a new User Function User Function Settings 53 User Function Parameters ED User Function Properties 3 Provided Input Interfaces 3 Provided Output Interfaces Convert Close Figure 41 UFE Standard T001 with a new User Function The User Function Settings table at the top of the UFE Standard T001 displays the general file informa tion and allows entering additional file attributes like a description and the name of the author of the file and his company The User Function Parameters table allows specifying a password for the User Function In case a User Function is protected by a password it can not be opened within the UFE Standard T001 without specify ing of the correct password In addition to the password it also can be specified whether the User Func tion shall forward the log entries of its contained functions when it is being used by an Analyzing Model or Analyzing Script The User Function Properties table displays basic information about the User Function like the operating modes which will it support In addition it allows entering the na
214. ncy Spectrum which has been calculated by the Frequency Analysis 146 Example of an Analyzing Model which monitors a Frequency Spectrum sses 147 Example of the Input Spectrum for the Spectrum Monitoring 1 ccccccccceecccceceeeeeteeecceeaeeeeeteeetsnnaees 148 Example of the Input Spectrum with Alarm Spectra ccccccccccccccccsceceeeeeeeccccaeeeeeeeeeeecaueaeeeeeeeeeeennaeas 149 Example of an Alarm Log ENY zemres ier AA epee ei ree ed ie eda 149 Example of the derived Input Spectrum with Alarm Spe ctra c sccccccccccecccceeceeeeeeeeecnaeaeeeeeeeeensnnaeas 150 Example of an Analyzing Model for the Order Analysis 0 cccccccccctcceeeeiireeeeeineeeeeenneeeeetnieeeeeeneeeees 151 Example of the Input Signals for the Order ANalySiS ccccccccccceeeiteeeeenneeeeeteneeeeeenieeeeetiieeeeetneeeeees 152 Example of a Frequency Spectrum and of an Order Spectrum 2 0 0 1 ccccccceceeececeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeetennaees 153 Example of the Input Data for an X Y ENvelope cccccccceeeecccceeceeeeeeeeeceneaeeeeeeetesecaueaeeeeeeeeeneenaees 156 Example of the Input Data for an X Y Envelope together with the calculated Envelopes 159 Example of an Analyzing Model for the monitoring of the current x and y online Data 160 Example of an Analyzing Script for the monitoring of the current x and y online Data 0 160 Example of the Output of MonitorXYEnvelope ceeeceececeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeee
215. nd change the Profile Description within the Loading Profile Settings table gt Save the Loading Profile via the Save button The modified Loading Profile is still displayed below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Loading Profile Files branch of the STS Explorer Ready At this point you know how to open and modify an existing Loading Profile English Release 2012 09 74 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 10 5 Starting and Stopping of Loading Profiles Loading Profiles can not be started or stopped Instead Loading Profiles are being used by Offline Data Load ers for their advanced append overwrite and export operations 6 10 6 Advanced Loading of Offline Data Open the STS Explorer e Open the Storage System and ensure that the STS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Storage System workspace Functionality e Like the simple loading of offline data also the advanced loading of offline data uses the ODL Standard T001 for the actual loading Opening of the ODL Standard T001 is identical no matter whether the simple or the advanced mechanisms for loading of offline data are going to be used e Method 1 for starting of the advanced loading of offline data o Within the MDS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer branch o Click onto the present Offline Data branch with the right mouse button in order to open the context
216. ne Data gt All Online Data and Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Offline Data gt All Offline Data branches of the MDS Explorer English Release 2012 09 128 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Functionality e Fast Analysis Scripts are created and maintained in exactly the same way as normal Analyzing Scripts see point 6 14 The main difference for the creation and maintaining is that normal Analyzing Scripts are stored to locations of type Configuration Files and Fast Analysis Scripts are stored to locations of type Fast Analysis e The following things are special for Fast Analysis Scripts o Fast Analysis Scripts do not need pre defined input data Instead variables can be used for input data when a Fast Analysis is started via the MDS Explorer these variables are filled with the currently chosen online or offline data and the calculation is performed on base of this data o The syntax for variables which shall represent input data for the Fast Analysis Script is INPUT_DATA_ x where x 1 for the first selected data from the MDS Explorer x 2 for the second selected data x 3 for the third selected data and so on The syntax like INPUT _DATA_1 can be used everwhere where also the direct reference to data like Online Data or Offline Data can be used o There is no way to define the names of the output data of Fast Analysis S
217. ne data Report Trigger shows a rising edge m with a delay of 5 seconds o The configuration within the Automatic Reports Trigger table can be as follows Parameter Value Trigger Mode Repeating Time Domain Online Data with absolute Timestamps Trigger Data Name Report Trigger Trigger Type Threshold Threshold Type Rising Edge with Threshold Threshold Value 0 5 Hysteresis Value 0 1 Capture Delay Format s Capture Delay Value 5 6 25 5 Example Configuration Files The Monitoring View Example for an Automatic Report from the example location provides an example for automatic reports In order to receive a report via this Monitoring View the following Configuration Files from the example location must be running e the Interface Profile Simulation T001 e the Device Profile ION AnalogInput T001 e the Analyzing Model Abs 01 e the Analyzing Model AddV2D 01 e the Analyzing Model H2D 01 e the Analyzing Model FFT 01 English Release 2012 09 125 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS The report which is created through this Monitoring View looks like in the following example Example for an Automatic Report Monitoring Chart 01 MTC yt TOO1 Monitoring Chart 03 MTC yn TOOL 2 0 Abs 01 AbsForSignal 50 184 Abs 01 Signal 45 1 677 JON AnalogInput TOOL CHO6 V 40 im 1 2 35 1 0 30 0
218. ne data available within the MDS Explorer Functionality e Within the ANS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Libraries gt User Functions branch e The present User Functions can be dropped into the AME Standard T001 e The input and output arguments of the User Function can be connected to any other Analyzing and User functions within the Analyzing Model e After the Analyzing Model has been completed it can be saved and started Try it out gt Create a new empty Analyzing Model gt Drag amp Drop two online data from the MDS Explorer into the AME Standard T001 gt Drag amp Drop the User Function HelloW which has been created during the previous tutorial from the ANS Explorer into the AME Standard T001 gt Drag amp Drop the Analyzing Function Out from the ANS Explorer into the AME Standard T001 gt Connect the outputs of the two inputs to the inputs of HelloW and the output of HelloW to the input of Out Specify a name for the output data and save the Analyzing Model gt The Analyzing Model looks like in the following example Analyzing Model Settings 5 Analyzing Model Parameters E Offline Time Configuration J Treatment of Status Codes ION Analoginput T001 CHO1 ION Analoginput T001 CHO2 Open Save a Convert Close Figure 45 AME Standard T001 with the HelloW User Function gt Start the Analyzing Model The output data which has be
219. ne ee ee tneee ee taeeeeetaeeeeetiaeeeeetieeeeetaa 97 Using of User Functions within Analyzing Models 0 ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeneeeeesnaeeeeeeaaes 99 Using of User Functions within Analyzing Scripts 0 ccccccceceeeseeeeeeeetteeeeetieeeeeetneeeereaa 101 Behavior of User FUNG ONS ii ccccccccece cen tendeecebenecceetahaea deb baadee ce taei anea aE iaei EA A 103 Examples of User Functions ccccccccceeeecceceeeeeeeeeenaeceeeeeeeeeececaeaeeeeeeesessccueeeeeeeeessesnsaness 104 Storage of offline Data via Storage Profiles 2 0 0 eect cence eee eeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeesnaeeeeeeaa 105 General DESCHIPUIOM EE E A E tabeceeed 105 Creation of a new Storage Profile for offline Data ee ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeaeees 105 SD Visualization eied dees shades aiian Raa NNa iudecebbudede AKAA S Oia esi decevuaiiccchvnungeccueaieceeeendeeev engi 107 General DESCrIPUON EE A E TEE 107 Visualization Of Data iN 3D rretan apee a e a a ea A EA E E EAEE 107 Dale Modein nana lids ween dentist chk ca cee anid E E et 109 General Description s smiter e eiae a d dared ea aA EE aE i seal deen 109 lmportant mte o e EEE T TA T E E a heal ee 109 safe Mod s iin teed rS R E R she RAA E AAR ote a eee ee A 109 XeTOONS SSVICG siete ecescth hte dee teks eb ceed coca ectece tel bf dcens hgeeedians chee Maapie salad cent led decent ecteny 110 Sequence Contoh issnin ee aw Mabe aac aa ee A le A 110 General DeSCription ae a
220. neeeseenaeeeeesenas 49 6 5 3 Removing of a Configuration File Location cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaas 50 6 6 Simulated Devices and Interface Profiles 2 0 2 eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 50 6 6 1 General Descriptio Msi con inean bond ie ded Hie teeta ddan eevee 50 6 6 2 Creation of a new Interface Profile for the Simulation Interface cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeee 51 6 6 3 Opening of existing Interface Profiles 0 0 0 2 eee ener erent ee ee tie ee ee teeeeeteeeee teaser teeeerea 52 6 6 4 Starting and Stopping of Interface Profiles 0 00 0 eee centre erence ee eneeeee teaser eeeeeetneeeere 54 English Release 2012 09 4 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 7 6 7 1 6 7 2 6 7 3 6 7 4 6 8 6 8 1 6 8 2 6 8 3 6 8 4 6 9 6 9 1 6 9 2 6 9 3 6 9 4 6 10 6 10 1 6 10 2 6 10 3 6 10 4 6 10 5 6 10 6 6 11 6 11 1 6 11 2 6 11 3 6 12 6 12 1 6 12 2 6 13 6 13 1 6 13 2 6 13 3 6 13 4 6 14 6 14 1 6 14 2 6 14 3 6 14 4 6 15 6 15 1 6 15 2 English Release 2012 09 Device Configuration and Device Profiles ccc cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeseenaeeeeeseneeeeseaas 55 General Descripti N israr are hes deca pee a ret a pen ee 55 Creation of a new Device Profile for an ION AnalogInput T001 0 ce eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 55 Opening of existing Device Profiles 2 0 0 ec eee eter ee etnee ee tiie eter e
221. nfigured within the started Analyzing Script becomes available within the MDS Explorer gt Create another new empty Analyzing Script gt Drag amp Drop the User Function HelloW2 which has been created during the previous tutorial from the ANS Explorer into the ASE Standard T001 English Release 2012 09 101 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS gt Provide two online data from the MDS Explorer as first two parameters for HelloW and specify a data name for the to be returned data as third parameter gt The Analyzing Script looks like in the following example 2 Analyzing Script Settings 5 Analyzing Script Parameters J Offline Time Configuration J Treatment of Status Codes var maini HelloW2 ION AnalogInput TOO1 CHOI TON AnalogiInput TOO1 CHO2 HelloWw2 j Line 7 Column 1 New Open ve Close Figure 48 ASE Standard T001 with the HelloW2 User Function gt Start the Analyzing Script The output data which has been configured within the started Analyzing Script becomes available within the MDS Explorer gt Compare the output of both Analyzing Scripts within the Monitoring System Both Analyzing Script produce identical output data gt Stop both Analyzing Scripts The data which have been configured within the started Analyzing Scripts are being removed from the MDS Explorer Ready At this point you know how to use a User Function within
222. ng System gt Double click onto an Interface Profile ipf xts Analyzing Model amf xts or onto another Configuration File which is present within a Configuration File location of the X Tools Server The Configuration File is opened through X Tools and is displayed within its according editor gt Double click onto a system log file slf xtc or sIf xts The system log file is opened through X Tools and is displayed within the System Log Viewer Ready At this point you know how to open offline data files and Configuration Files of X Tools via a double click onto the files within the Explorer of Windows English Release 2012 09 135 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 7 Attachment A Best Practices 7 1 Inside Operating Systems 7 1 1 General Each of the supported operating systems shows slightly different behavior in different situations At different places this behavior must be considered when using of X Tools The following topics describe the key places of each operating system e Microsoft Windows XP e Microsoft Windows Server 2003 e Microsoft Windows 7 In addition the following remarks are valid for all operating systems e All components of X Tools must run with administrator privileges in order to provide all of the required functionality o The behavior of X Tools is undefined in case the necessary administrator privileges are not available e Incase the X Tools Server ha
223. ng columns By default the X Tools Server provides an account with user name Administrator and password administrator How ever the password for the user Administrator also can be changed in which case the proper other password must be provided e The User Name is case insensitive e The Password and Password confirm entries are case sensitive e The Save and Save As buttons are used in order to save the configured Main Profile with all of its set tings All saved Main Profiles are shown by the MMS Explorer Main gt Files gt YourLocation gt Main Profile Files branch and can be accessed e g started stopped opened from there e Fora more detailed description of all available functionalities of the MPE Standard T001 refer to the ref erence manual of the Main Management System chapter MPE Standard T001 Try it out gt Create a new Main Profile gt Enter a target IP address of 127 0 0 1 and do not change the default values of the other columns gt Save the Main Profile At the first save the Save As dialog will pop up and offers a default file name Change the default file name to Hello Main Profile and press OK in order to save it to the disk The new Main Profile now is displayed below the Main gt Files gt Default Location gt Main Profile Files branch of the MMS Explorer English Release 2012 09 42 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01
224. ngs Try it out gt Open an existing Main Profile gt Enter another target IP address and change the Profile Description within the Main Profile Settings table gt Save the Main Profile via the Save button The modified Main Profile is still displayed below the Main gt Files gt Default Location gt Main Profile Files branch of the MMS Explorer Ready At this point you know how to open and modify an existing Main Profile English Release 2012 09 43 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 3 4 Starting and Stopping of Main Profiles Open the MMS Explorer e Open the Main Management System and ensure that the MMS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Main Management System workspace Functionality e Within the MMS Explorer expand the Main gt Files gt Default Location gt Main Profile Files branch e Click onto any of the present Main Profiles with the right mouse button in order to open the context menu e In order to start the currently selected Main Profile choose Start from the context menu o Up to one Main Profile can be started at any time In case a Main Profile is started already and the user starts another one the currently running Main Profile is stopped automatically and the other Main Profile is being started afterwards o Incase there is no Main Profile being started at the moment the X Tools Client does not connect to any X Tools Server When th
225. ning band to a time series ope LowerWarningBand ope LowerWarningBandTS convert the x buffer of the error bands to a time series ConvB1DToTS XY Envel XY Envel convert the upper ConvB1DToTS XY Envel XY Envel convert the lower ConvB1DToTS XY Envel XY Envel ope XBufferError ope XBufferErrorTS error band to a time series ope UpperErrorBand ope UpperErrorBandTS error band to a time series ope LowerErrorBand ope LowerErrorBandTS The following screenshots shows the visualization of the example x and y data together with the calculated en velopes 1 x Offline Data with absolute Timestamps 2 XY Envelope XBufferWarningTS Offline Data with absolute Timestamps 2011 12 13 08 59 54 974 011 396 GMT 01 00 2011 12 13 08 59 54 994 028 144 GMT 01 00 2011 12 13 08 59 54 994 028 144 GMT 01 00 i 3 XY Envelope XBufferErrorTS Offline Data with absolute Timestamps xf L yH XY Envelope XBufferWwarningTsS i XY Envelope UpperWarningBandTS _ XY Envelope Lower WarningBandTS XY Envelope XBufferErrorTS I t XY Envelope UpperErrorBandTS t XY Envelope LowerErrorBandTS PH oot too gt i ia 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 i 1 1 0 0 0 0 4 2 0 8 6 4 2 0 3 6 4 2 07 8 67 4 2 7 0 2q 4 66 Figure 66 Example of the Input Data for
226. ns In case there is no data available from the newly chosen time domain and with the known name an according icon is displayed by the legend of the Monitoring Chart o The time domain for the whole Monitoring View can be changed via the Time Domain cell of the Moni toring View Parameters table of the MVE Standard T001 The chosen time domain from the Monitor ing View Parameters table is applied to all of the opened Monitoring Charts of the MVE Standard T001 immediately Try it out gt Create a new Monitoring View gt Drag some offline data from the MDS Explorer into the Monitoring View in order to visualize the data curves gt Turn the cursors on and take a look onto the displayed measurement values Zoom into the visualization shrink and stretch the axes scaling and use the undo redo buttons Repeat these operations in random order in order to adjust the visualization to the needs of the current application gt Open two additional Monitoring Charts within the Monitoring View and start to visualize data also with the two additional Monitoring Charts gt Add online data and offline data to one Monitoring Chart in order to visualize them in parallel gt Use the Time Domain cells of the Chart Options dialog and of the MVE Standard T0071 in order to switch the time domains of a single Monitoring Chart or of all Monitoring Charts simultaneously Ready At this point you know how to visualize offline data how to switch the vi
227. nstalla tion The new version can be started now and automatically uses all of the Configuration Files and set tings from the previous installation 4 1 3 5 2 Parallel Installation to the old Version The installation of V 03 05 in parallel to V 03 02 or later can be performed like it is described by point 4 1 3 4 1 for V 03 01 SP1 and earlier Although multiple versions of X Tools can be installed in parallel the IEEE1394 driver for the to be used SIPLUS CMS IEEE1394 drivers must be upgraded when V 03 03 or later shall be used or downgraded when V 03 02 SP1 or earlier shall be used as described by point 4 1 3 2 English Release 2012 09 30 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 4 2 Hardware Installation 4 2 1 How to connect SIPLUS CMS to your Application SIPLUS CMS is designed to work as far as possible as a reactionless system to the existing process and auto mation system Because of this attempt binary and analog signals which are available anywhere in the process can be connected to the high resistance input ports of the JONs and or IFNs in parallel to the existing system To extract data from bus systems like PROFIBUS DP the available IONs have to be added simply as physical bus members There are no changes in the configuration of these buses needed because the according IONs are realized as spy modules and are not logical members of the bus Different software IONs are available for severa
228. nstalled memory is relevant for the calculations of the X Tools Server the con figured size of the page file of Windows is ignored Suspending of Configuration Files is being performed in the following order e Monitoring Views are suspended first e Analyzing Models are suspended next e Analyzing Scripts are suspended next e Storage Profiles are suspended next e Device Profiles are suspended at last As soon as there is enough memory available in the system again the X Tools Server starts to resume its Con figuration Files again Resuming is being performed in the following order e Device Profiles are resumed first e Storage Profiles are resumed next e Analyzing Scripts are resumed next e Analyzing Models are resumed next e Monitoring Views are resumed at last In cases where the X Tools Server suspends Configuration Files because of low memory conditions the fol lowing measures can be performed e There may be other Windows applications running which consume large amounts of memory Stop these applications in order to make the memory available for the X Tools Server e The amount of tasks which have to be performed by the X Tools Server in parallel can be reduced It may be possible to stop Configuration Files which are not needed any more e t may make sense to reduce the size of the buffers for online data The default value is found within the Global Options Editor additional configurations are possible within each De
229. ntinue the visualization zoom into the visualization shrink and stretch the axes scaling rotate and move the cuboid and use the undo redo buttons Repeat these operations in random order in order to ad just the visualization to the needs of the current application Ready At this point you know how to visualize 2 dimensional data with the 3D functionality of the Monitoring System English Release 2012 09 108 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 18 Safe Mode 6 18 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn how to use the safe mode of the X Tools Server in order to recover automatically from severe error conditions and in order to allow the X Tools Server to continue with its measurement analy sis and storage tasks afterwards This chapter contains the following topics e Important Facts e Safe Mode e X Tools Service 6 18 2 Important Facts During the startup of the X Tools Server each operation e g initialization of a component or start of a Configu ration File is logged into an according Initialization Log File When a severe error e g a crash or a hang is being detected and the X Tools Server is being restarted in safe mode afterwards the formerly created Initialization Log File is being examined and the operation which probably caused the previous error is not being executed again Thus the remaining functionality which has been configured can be started and execute
230. ntly available online and or offline data English Release 2012 09 91 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 15 User Functions for the Encapsulation of Analysis Tasks 6 15 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn how to create User Functions User Functions can be used in order to combine multiple Analyzing and User functions to a new entity Uses cases for User Functions are e The same or similar analysis tasks are being used by different Analyzing Models or Analyzing Scripts e Complex analysis tasks can be represented by a single User Function which improves the readability of Analyzing Models and Analyzing Scripts e User Functions can improve the maintainability All Analyzing Models and Analyzing Scripts which contain a User Function use the latest version of this User Function whenever the Analyzing Model or Analyzing Script is being used Thus changing of one User Function can be used in order to update all of the Ana lyzing Models and Analyzing Scripts which use this User Function e The internal calculations shall be hidden from other users User Functions can be protected agains read ing in order to secure the contained know how Like Analyzing Functions User Functions can not be executed stand alone They perform their configured tasks only during the processing of their parent Analyzing Model or Analyzing Script In addition to the full name and to the short name also a cate
231. o Within the ANS Explorer expand the Main gt Editors gt User Function Editors branch o Drag the UFE Standard T001 with the left mouse into the empty space at the right side of the ANS Explorer An empty UFE Standard T001 is opened automatically o Press the New button in order to create a new User Function The new User Function is displayed by the UFE Standard T001 with default values English Release 2012 09 92 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS O This method works in all cases even in case there is no X Tools Server connected at the moment It can be used for the creation and configuration of User Functions for cases where the target X Tools Server is not present at the moment e Method 2 for the creation of a new User Function O This method works only in case the UFE Standard T001 is defined as Default Editor for Functions within the Global Options Editor of the X Tools Client Within the ANS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Libraries gt Analyzing Func tions branch Expand also the Arithmetic branch and drag a below Analyzing Function e g the Abs Analyzing Function into the empty Analyzing System workspace A UFE Standard T001 with a default User Function which also contains the dropped Analyzing Function is opened automatically Instead of an Analyzing Function from the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Li
232. o examples left mouse button down mouse move Release 2012 09 13 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction 2 Scope of Delivery 2 1 Scope of Delivery What is shipped e CD Setup SIPLUS CMS X Tools Software amp Documentation e Certificate of License e USB Stick which contains the license information 2 2 Unpacking and Checking After unpacking please check e the packet for completeness and e all parts for transport damage SIPLUS CMS Notice Do not use any parts that show evidence of damage English Release 2012 09 14 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 3 Product Characteristics 3 1 Introduction 3 1 1 What is SIPLUS CMS SIPLUS CMS is a cost effective modular PC based measurement system which has been specially optimized to perform reactionless measurement of analog binary and numerical signals in industrial plants It consists out of a PC based software X Tools and various types of measurement devices IONs IFNs and CTNs With a sampling rate of up to 192 kHz even highly dynamic processes and occurrences can be recorded with high resolution The system is used as a portable and or installed unit in the fields of research amp development testing error tracking and production Input and output signals are handled by individual devices To accommodate a higher number of signals basi cally up to 62 devices can be networked over the IEEE139
233. oW HelloW2 provides less possibilities to the parent Analyzing Model or Analyzing Script to influence the processing of the input and output data because HelloW2 in ternally contains the In and Out Analyzing Functions which decide about the to be used interpolation and record modes Depending to the target application both methods for the embedding of input and output data can have their advantages and disadvantages and it must be decided for each application which approach is more suitable Ready At this point you know how to create a new User Function which can be used by Analyzing Models and Analyz ing Scripts in order to perform calculations based on online and or offline data 6 15 3 Opening of existing User Functions Open the ANS Explorer e Open the Analyzing System and ensure that the ANS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Ana lyzing System workspace Functionality e Method 1 for the opening of an existing User Function o Within the ANS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt User Func tion Files branch o Drag one of the below User Functions with the left mouse into the empty space at the right side of the ANS Explorer A User Function Editor of proper type is opened automatically and displays the dropped User Function English Release 2012 09 97 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS e Method 2 for the open
234. oduction SIPLUS CMS 6 8 3 Opening of existing Monitoring Views Open the MTS Explorer e Open the Monitoring System and ensure that the MTS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Moni toring System workspace Functionality e Within the MTS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Monitoring View Files branch e Drag one of the below Monitoring Views with the left mouse into the empty space at the right side of the MTS Explorer A Monitoring View Editor of proper type is opened automatically and displays the dropped Monitoring View Monitoring View Settings Monitoring View Parameters ION AnalogInput T001 CHO1 26 xxx _ ION Analoginput TO01 CHO2 V 6 xxx 59 05 01 05 02 05 03 05 04 O5 05 05 06 05 107 05 08 2011 01 re i3 104 58 mmiss 2011 01 13 13 05 08 mm ss GMT 01 00 459 0500 S01 OS2 0S0a 0S04 0S0S osu oso osc 04 59 05 00 05 01 05 02 05 03 05 04 05 05 05 06 5 08 2011 01 13 13 04 58 mmiss 2011 01 13 13 05 08 inven ss Stor 00 Save As Figure 29 MVE Standard T001 with an opened Monitoring View e The opened Monitoring View can be edited now and can be used for any visualization of data After edit ing the Save and Save As buttons are used in order to save the edited Monitoring View with all of its settings Try it out gt Open an existing Monitoring View gt Add additional data
235. of Screenshots Open a Monitoring View e Open a Monitoring View and display data with at least two different Monitoring Charts for example one MTC yt T001 and one MTC yx T001 Functionality e Call the context menu from the Curve Area of any present Monitoring Chart and choose Save Screen shot e The screenshot of the current Monitoring View is being saved to the X Tools Client User Screenshot directory of your X Tools installation Try it out gt Display some data within a Monitoring Chart gt Save a screenshot of the displayed data gt After the screenshot has been saved open the created file and verify that it matches the original Monitor ing View Ready At this point you know how to use the screenshot functionality in order to save the appearing of the currently visualized Monitoring View 6 25 Creation of Automatic Reports out of the Monitoring System 6 25 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn how to create images of the current visualizations within Monitoring Views auto matically based on a trigger data and on additional trigger information which is provided to the Monitoring View Whenever a Monitoring View with offline data as input runs into an error it stops automatically This is different to Monitoring View with online data as input which suspend in such a situation and attempt to resume after the error condition is gone The main reasons for this different kind of handling are
236. ofile Settings INo Parameter Value o o YOURSERVER Storage Path Default Location Creation Date N A Modification Date N A Target Interface Name Simulation T001 6 Profile Description Company Name 8 Author Name Example Author amp Connections No Enabled Device Name Device Type Device UIK Hex E eaa t Save s Figure 24 IPE Simulation T001 with a new Interface Profile e The Interface Profile Settings table at the top of the IPE Simulation T001 displays the general file infor mation and allows entering additional file attributes like a description and the name of the author of the file and his company English Release 2012 09 51 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS e Within the Connections table the to be simulated devices are configured In order to configure a new de vice simple choose the desired device type from the Device Type field e By default the values from the other columns of the Connections table do not need to be modified o The Device Name and Device UIK fields can be used in order to change the default name and UIK of each device which will be simulated e The Save and Save As buttons are used in order to save the configured Interface Profile with all of its settings All saved Interface Profiles are shown by the DMS Explorer Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Interface Profile Files branch and can be accesse
237. ols User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS e The following types of files can be opened by the X Tools Client only when the local X Tools Server is connected to the X Tools Client o Offline data files sdf xts o WAVE files wav o User Function Files o current log file of the X Tools Server e All other types of files can not be opened within a dialog of X Tools e Whenever a file of the X Tools Server xts shall be opened the X Tools Client automatically attempts to connect to the X Tools Server o Incase the connection succeeds and the selected files are available to the X Tools Server they are present within a known location of the X Tools Server they are opened via the X Tools Server o Incase the connection can not be established or the selected files are not available to the X Tools Server the opening is either canceled in case of files which can not be opened without the X Tools Server or the user can choose whether the files shall be opened from the local file system of the X Tools Client Try it out gt Double click onto an offline data file sdf xts which is present within an offline file location of the X Tools Server The offline data is loaded through X Tools and is displayed within the Monitoring System Double click onto a WAVE file wav which is present within an offline file location of the X Tools Server The offline data is loaded through X Tools and is displayed within the Monitori
238. ols Server the visualization of data at the X Tools Cli ent may be shifted to the past or to the future in case its system time is not synchronized to the X Tools Server that provides the visualized data The used method for the time synchronization must ensure that the system time of the synchronized computers does not produce noticeable jumps into the past or into the future See point 7 2 for general information about how to time synchronization mechanisms which are built in to Windows English Release 2012 09 19 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Note In case the X Tools Client and the X Tools Server are running at different computers the used connection must provide a throughput of at least 64 kBit s and a latency of less than two seconds Weaker connections can cause errors during the connecting process and during operations like opening of Con figuration Files closing of Configuration Files and visualization of data For fluent handling of big files and lots of visualizations a throughput of above 512 kBit s and a latency of less than one second are recommended Note Various system configurations have been tested on SIMATIC RACK PCs and SIMATIC MICROBOX PCs Other standard PC configurations also have been tested successfully but proper system behavior only can be en sured on SIMATIC platforms At the moment of the release of V 03 05 of X Tools only the C series of SIMATIC PCs
239. om the MDS Explorer Ready At this point you know how to start and stop existing Analyzing Models in order to start and stop the calculations based on the currently available online and or offline data English Release 2012 09 86 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 14 Analyzing of Data via Analyzing Scripts 6 14 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn how to analyze data from the MDS Explorer with the Analyzing System via Ana lyzing Scripts An Analyzing Script contains all of the information which is needed in order to perform calcula tions based on the specified input data This information includes the order of execution and the parameters of all to be called Analyzing and User functions Multiple Analyzing Scripts can be started and running simulta neously at any time In addition the data which are defined as output data within a started Analyzing Script are available to all other modules of X Tools via the MDS Explorer Examples of Analyzing Scripts are found within the example Configuration File location which is being delivered together with X Tools This chapter contains the following topics e Creation of a new Analyzing Script e Opening of existing Analyzing Scripts e Starting and Stopping of Analyzing Scripts 6 14 2 Creation of a new Analyzing Script Open the ANS Explorer e Open the Analyzing System and ensure that the ANS Explorer is displayed at the left side o
240. onto the Device Profiles which are provided via the example location see point 6 5 in order to see various application examples about the capabilities and usage of Device Profiles Ready At this point you know how to create a new Device Profile which can be used in order to configure an ION AnalogInput T001 English Release 2012 09 57 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 7 3 Opening of existing Device Profiles Open the DMS Explorer e Open the Device Management System and ensure that the DMS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Device Management System workspace Functionality e Within the DMS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Device Profile Files branch e Drag one of the below Device Profiles with the left mouse into the empty space at the right side of the DMS Explorer A Device Profile Editor of proper type is opened automatically and displays the dropped Device Profile Device Profile Settings a aici Profile Data EE Enatedl Nene Unk Deserpton Desinaion ype Nomalzaion HodejNomakzaion Perens Redon 0 000 yO 0 000 x1 1 000 y1 ZET Each Yalue Decimal32 y0 x1 x0 0 000 y0 0 000 x1 1 000 y1 1 000 Each Value Decimal32 YO x1 x0 0 000 y0 0 000 x1 1 000 y1 1 000 Each Value Decimal32 YO x1 x0 0 000 y0 0 000 x1 1 000 y1 1 000 Each Value Decimal32 yO x1 x0 0 000 y0 0 000 x1 1 000
241. ore because it already has loaded the relevant contents Therefore the following conditions apply for all Configuration Files of X Tools e Incase a Configuration File is being updated through the user e g via X Tools or directly via overwriting of the file outside of X Tools the modified contents are not being taken over by X Tools automatically The changes are being taken over in the following cases o when the Configuration File is being stopped and restarted e g also after a restart of X Tools o incase a Configuration File has been suspended and Automatic Takeover of changed Configuration Files is set to Perform automatic Takeover only in case the Configuration File is suspended within the global options o incase Automatic Takeover of changed Configuration Files is set to Perform automatic Takeover whenever the Source File at the Disk has been changed within the global options English Release 2012 09 40 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS e The actual file at the disk may be renamed moved or deleted e g via X Tools or directly outside of X Tools in which case it also disappears from the according explorer tree of X Tools In all of these cases the actual execution of the already running Configuration File is not being interrupted thus the according explorer tree of X Tools may not be able to display all of the currently running Configuration Files o Atthe n
242. oring Views can be specified e Examples for the full command line o C ASIPLUS CMS X Tools Client Bin X Tools Client exe openMVF YourServer Default Loca tion Open me o C ASIPLUS CMS X Tools Client Bin X Tools Client exe openMVF YourServer Default Loca tion Open me openMVF YourServer Default Location SubDirectory Open me e Incase the X Tools Client is running already when such a command line is ran again the already run ning X Tools Client is re used and displays the specified Monitoring Views o All Monitoring Views which are not part of the command line are closed automatically no matter whether they contain unsaved changes at the moment or not Try it out gt Close the X Tools Client and the X Tools Server gt Create a shortcut to the executable of the X Tools Client X Tools Client exe gt Edit the shortcut and add the openMVF command line parameters together with the path to an existing Monitoring View Save and execute the shortcut The X Tools Client is being started and starts the X Tools Server automatically In addition the speci fied Monitoring View File is being opened and visualizes the previously configured data Ready At this point you know how to use the command line parameters of the X Tools Client in order to automatically open a Monitoring View after the startup of the X Tools Client English Release 2012 09 116 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools
243. other MTC yt T001 from the MTS Explorer into the already opened Monitoring View Editor The second MTC yt T001 is added to the Monitoring View Editor which contains two MTC yt T001 now gt Use the Full Screen button of one MTC yt T001 in order to put it into full screen mode Double click onto the title bar of the MTC yt T001 in full screen mode afterwards in order to put it back to its previous size gt Click into the title bar of one MTC yt T001 and keep the left mouse button pressed while moving the mouse Place the dragged MTC yt T001 right to the second MTC yt T001 within the Monitoring View Editor gt Use the Maximize button of one MTC yt T001 in order to maximize the MTC yt T001 within the Monitor ing View Editor gt Move the mouse cursor onto some menu buttons in order to get the tool tips of the menu buttons being displayed Ready At this point you know the basics of the user interface of the X Tools Client and you know how to arrange the opened windows to your needs 6 2 4 Available Data Master Data System Explorer The Master Data System Explorer displays all of the data which is currently available at the X Tools Server From there the currently available data can be moved to the other systems of X Tools via simple Drag amp Drop operations Online Data Online data is defined as the data which is currently received from the attached devices and which is configured via Device Profiles see point 6 7 In a
244. ove delete operation lt Ctrl gt lt C gt performs a copy operation lt Ctrl gt lt X gt performs a cut operation lt Ctrl gt lt V gt performs a paste operation lt Enter gt puts the cell which owns the input focus currently into editing mode and highlights its current value lt Backspace gt puts the cell which owns the input focus currently into editing mode and clears its current value lt Cursor left gt moves the input focus one column to the left lt Cursor right gt moves the input focus one column to the right lt Cursor up gt moves the input focus one row to the top lt Cursor down gt moves the input focus one row to the bottom lt Tab gt jumps from the current table to the next table tree menu bar lt Shift gt lt Tab gt jumps from the current table to the previous table tree menu bar English Release 2012 09 174 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS The following keyboard operations are provided in case the table is in editing mode Keyboard Operation Description lt Del gt performs a remove operation lt Ctrl gt lt C gt performs a copy operation lt Ctrl gt lt X gt performs a cut operation lt Ctrl gt lt V gt performs a paste operation lt Esc gt discards the changed value and puts the cell which owns the input focus curren
245. owenarningBand Spectrum Envelope LowerErrorBand 2011 12 13 17 36 43 500 000 000 GMT 01 00 Heed 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 i A Figure 72 Example of the Input Data for a Spectrum Envelope together with the calculated Envelopes 7 4 6 4 Monitoring of Spectrum Envelopes After the necessary envelopes have been calculated they can be used for monitoring of the currently present spectrum data The following screenshot shows the Analyzing Model 40 Monitor Spectrum Envelope from the example location which uses the above envelopes in order to monitor the current online spectrum 7 002 InSpm Spectrum Envelope BE il 003 InSpm Spectrum Envelope a InSpm lt Control Lower Nam Spectrum Envelope g bes Figure 73 Example of an Analyzing Model for the monitoring of the current online Spectrum In order to simulate some spectrum with errors the Analyzing Model 30 Simulate Spectrum with Errors must be started This Analyzing Model needs about 15 seconds before it can provide the output data Spectrum English Release 2012 09 164 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS thus the Analyzing Model 40 Monitor Spectrum Envelope shall not be started before this time before the online data Spectrum appears within the MDS Explorer In case the Analyzing Model 40 Monitor Spectrum Envelope is started befor
246. pecify the values of the input arguments of the function e Via the context menu functions can be cut copied pasted removed and their visualization can be modi fied e Analyzing Functions from the category Input are being used in order to get online or offline data from the system into the User Function Analyzing Functions from the category Output are being used in or der to put online or offline data from the User Function back to the system e Each User Function must provide inputs and outputs which can be used later by the Analyzing Model or Analyzing Script which embeds the User Function In order to add an input which is visible from outside call the context menu above the input argument which shall be visible outside and choose Add Input In terface In order to add an output which is visible from outside call the context menu above the output argument and choose Add Output Interface e After an input or output interface has been created the name unit description and default value can be edited within the Provided Input Interfaces and Provided Output Interfaces table e A User Function is not limited to a certain operating mode calculation mode cycle time or output data class All of these parameters are configured only within the parent Analyzing Model or Analyzing Script in the later step Depending to the contained functions a User Function may not be able to operate in all operating modes and calculat
247. play a point in time e g the MTC yn T001 or the MTC ynm T001 the currently displayed point in time of the currently displayed data is being stored e After the Store Data Snapshot button has been pressed a copy of the to be stored data is being created automatically After the storing has been completed the memory which has been used for the copy is freed again e While the storing is going on the Storage Progress dialog is being shown and displays information about the progress of the storing The Cancel button of the Storage Progress dialog can be used in or der to cancel the ongoing storing e Multiple data snapshots can be stored in parallel in case the Store Data Snapshot button is pressed mul tiple times e The data snapshot can be created for all types of data for offline data and for paused or running online data e All offline data files which are created by a data snapshot are stored into one common directory The name of the created directory starts with Data Snapshot and also contains the date and time of the stor ing e The name of each offline data file consists out of the name of the data and of the date and time of the moment of the storing in order to receive unique file names also for scenarios where the same data name is present within the issuing Monitoring Chart multiple times e All offline data files are being stored to the offline data location which was used by the last store or ad vanced store oper
248. ple of a new Loading Profile Loading Profile Settings Default Time Configuration Tine Input Mode Se Time Domain Absolute Times Minimum Time Format None load from the Beginning 4 Minimum Time Value N A 5 Time Interval Format N A 6 Time Interval Value N A Maximum Time Format None load until the End Maximum Time Yalue N A Included Data Data Time Configuration Excluded Data INo Enabled Name o 0 _ Drag amp drop the data which shall be excluded from the MDS Explorer Figure 34 LPE Standard T001 with a new Loading Profile e The Loading Profile Settings table at the top of the LPE Standard T001 displays the general file informa tion and allows entering additional file attributes like a description and the name of the author of the file and his company e Within the Loading Profile Parameters table the to be used configuration can be configured o Choose Use included Data List in order to use the configuration from the Included Data table o Choose Use excluded Data List in order to use the configuration from the Excluded Data table o Choose Use default Time in order to apply the settings from the Default Time Configuration table to all of the data which are being loaded o Choose Use individual Times in order to allow individual configuration of the to be loaded time inter val for each data from the Included Data table e Within the Default Time Configuration ta
249. plied when the offline data is being exported Via the Time Input Mode cell and its below cells the to be exported time interval can be specified manually The OK button is used in order to start exporting of the currently selected data according to the cur rently chosen settings e Each loaded offline data is displayed by the MDS Explorer below its Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Offline Data gt All Offline Data branch From there it can be dragged into the other systems of X Tools for further analysis and visualization tasks e Fora more detailed description of all available functionalities of the ODL Standard T001 refer to the ref erence manual of the Storage System chapter ODL Standard T001 Try it out gt Open the ODL Standard T001 for the local X Tools Server gt Browse your offline data file locations for already stored offline data files gt Load a time interval of only 10 seconds of some offline data files The loaded offline data is being displayed within the MDS Explorer gt Overwrite the already loaded offline data with another period of time of the data Use the loading mode in order to load only one value per second for each of the selected data The information within the MDS Explorer is being updated accordingly gt Export some of the present offline data files Use a Loading Profile in order to predefine which of the se lected data shall be exported According export
250. r call the context menu for the Main gt Servers gt YourServerName item within the MMS Explorer and choose Edit User Accounts e The User Accounts Editor also can be opened via the User Accounts Editor button from the menu bar of the Main Management System workspace In this case an empty User Accounts Editor is being opened o Any of the present Main gt Servers gt YourServerName items from the MMS Explorer can be dragged into the empty User Accounts Editor in order to start editing of the user accounts of the X Tools Server e Fora more detailed description of all available functionalities of the User Accounts Editor refer to the reference manual of the Main Management System chapter User Accounts Editor Functionality e The User Accounts Settings table at the top of the User Accounts Editor displays the general file infor mation and allows entering additional file attributes like a description and the name of the author of the file and his company e Within the User Accounts table the currently defined user accounts are displayed In order to configure a new user account simply insert the user name into the User Name field In addition to the user name also a password can be assigned to each user account o Incase a user account from the User Accounts table is being selected the Access Rights Location Rights and Advanced Rights tables of the User Accounts Editor are updated automatically and dis
251. r e g in case additional offline data is appended in case the offline data is overwritten with other values or in case an Analyzing Model or Analyzing Script is executed again English Release 2012 09 39 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 2 5 Configuration Files Types Configuration Files are being used in order to configure all of the tasks of X Tools The following types of Con figuration Files are being provided by X Tools Configuration File Type Description Main Profiles Main Profiles are the only type of Configuration Files which are being config ured for the X Tools Client and are being used in order to connect from the X Tools Client to one or multiple X Tools Servers See point 6 3 Interface Profiles Interface Profiles are being used in order to connect the X Tools Server to devices e g via socket UDP TCP or serial port interfaces After devices have been connected their measurement data can be acquired via Device Profiles See point 6 6 Device Profiles Device Profiles are being used in order to configure the measurement data which shall be delivered by a certain device See point 6 7 Device Setups Device Setups are being used in order to store temporary data which is needed for the configuration or execution of Device Profiles like the address books of ION SIMATIC TDC T001 devices They are not editable by the user and are written and read autom
252. r information at once o The Advanced Append context menu item can be used in order to call the Advanced Append dia log for the currently selected files directories Within the Advanced Append dialog various settings can be provided which are applied when the actual appending of offline data is performed Incase a Loading Profile is specified via the Used Loading Profile cell the settings about to be included to be excluded and or desired time intervals and loading modes are read from the speci fied Loading Profile and applied during the loading of offline data Via the Loading Mode and Loading Parameters cells intelligent data reduction can be applied when the offline data is being loaded Via the Time Input Mode cell and its below cells the to be loaded time interval can be specified manually The OK button is used in order to start appending of the currently selected data according to the currently chosen settings o The Advanced Overwrite context menu item can be used in order to call the Advanced Overwrite dialog for the currently selected files directories Within the Advanced Overwrite dialog various set tings can be provided which are applied when the actual overwriting of offline data is performed In case a Loading Profile is specified via the Used Loading Profile cell the settings about to be included to be excluded and or desired time intervals and loading modes are read from the speci fied Loading Pro
253. r to open the Add Location dialog o This method can be used in order to create offline file locations of any supported type e All of the currently present offline file locations are listed within the Offline File Locations table of the ODL Standard T001 e Each offline file location shows only the files which match its configured location type e The new location can not be created within the sub directory of an existing location or within the parent directory of an existing location e One example directory for each supported type of offline file is delivered together with X Tools These di rectories are found below X Tools Server User Example Offline Files and can be used in order to add and use each of the supported types of offline file locations Try it out gt Add a new directory as additional offline file location All of the offline data files of matching type from the added location become visible within the Offline Data Files tree of the ODL Standard T001 Ready At this point you know how to add offline file locations to the X Tools Server English Release 2012 09 78 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 11 3 Removing of an Offline File Location Open the ODL Standard T001 e Open the Storage System and ensure that the ODL Standard T001 is displayed within the Storage System workspace Functionality e Expand the main branch of the Offline Data Files tree within the ODL
254. r when its configuration shall take into effect e Incase the X Tools Client or any of the currently connected X Tools Servers is being dragged into a non empty Global Options Editor the global options of the dragged item are opened instead of the cur rently displayed global options Try it out gt Open the Global Options Editor for the X Tools Client gt Change one or more of the displayed global options gt Save the Global Options File In case one or more changes require a restart of the whole application or a restart of single software modules an according message box is displayed to the user gt Open the Global Options Editor for any of the currently connected X Tools Servers gt Change one or more of the displayed global options gt Save the Global Options File In case one or more changes require a restart of the whole application or a restart of single software modules an according message box is displayed to the user Ready At this point you know how to open and edit the global options of the X Tools Client and of the X Tools Server English Release 2012 09 46 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 4 3 The User Accounts Editor Open the User Accounts Editor e Open the Main Management System and ensure that the MMS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Main Management System workspace e In order to open the User Accounts Editor for a connected X Tools Serve
255. rName Online Data All Online Data From there the online data can be used within all other systems of X Tools y Visualize the currently availabe online data open the MTS Monitoring System drag any online data from the MDS Explorer into the free space of the opened window Anew Monitoring View is being opened automatically and the dropped data is being visualized Additional data can be dropped into the same and or into additional Monitoring Views Store the currently availabe online data open the STS Storage System drag any data from the MDS Explorer into the free space of the opened window a new Storage Profile is being opened automatically and the dropped data is being added to its Data table additional data can be dropped into the Data table via Drag amp Drop configure the desired settings for the storing of the data press Save within the Storage Profile Editor within the STS Explorer expand Main Servers YourServerName Files Default Location Storage Profile Files right click with the mouse onto your saved Storage Profile choose Start After the Storage Profile has been started the X Tools Server initializes the storing according to the configured settings The stored data can loaded again later as offline data Load the currently available offline data open the MDS Master Data System within the
256. ral conditions in which an Analyzing Model can not run after it has been started e g in case the input data is not available at the moment or in case the output data can not be created because it is in use already When an Analyzing Model can not run after it has been started it is being suspended and automatically resumed as soon as the error condition has disappeared e Incase at least one Analyzing Model has been started by the user the status bar of the X Tools Client displays the current status of Analyzing Models via the according colored icon The tool tip of this icon provides detailed information about the number of currently started and suspended Analyzing Models o Note that the status bar always displays the status of exactly one X Tools Server thus also the icon for the current status of Analyzing Models displays the status of only the currently chosen X Tools Server English Release 2012 09 85 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Try it out gt Start an existing Analyzing Model Ensure that the configured input data is available within the MDS Ex plorer and that the configured output data does not exist within the MDS Explorer yet The output data which has been configured within the started Analyzing Model becomes available within the MDS Explorer gt Stop the currently running Analyzing Model The data which has been configured within the started Analyzing Model is being removed fr
257. raninin eit eh aa 37 6 2 4 Available Dates 22 itis a veces eid le Getta ved ee tes chat en pen eats 39 6 2 5 Configuration Files cccnvtietanitien lin tance waitin ata Rade eas 40 6 3 Client to Server Connectivity eroaren rirni teerien rinni eieae aei iiia Ten 41 6 3 1 General DeSCTiption eE EE TTT TE E E A 41 6 3 2 Creation of new Main Profiles assssennssrresrirrensrnesrnnssniananadianaeninanasnnaaniannaaaan antaen anaana anana 41 6 3 3 Opening of existing Main Profiles e esia erreira EEEE EREEREER 43 6 3 4 Starting and Stopping of Main Profiles 2 0 2 eee eeeteee erties eee eneeeeeteeeeetneeeeetneeeeee 44 6 3 5 Securingiof the X TOOIS Sever opoo a A A E a Ta 44 6 3 6 X Tools Server Connectivity Dialog 2 2 0 0 eeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeseneaeeeseeeaeeesenaeeeseeaeees 45 6 4 Global Connigurations s2cee 2 sists Goan eel avin ek dei coi ee ele eet ah 45 6 4 1 General DeScriptioniin civtecon dice Leo acter donde tain nei eee ee ee 45 6 4 2 The Global Options Edito sinere dansai eb a eben ered aes aeiae diaaa anaiei 46 6 4 3 The User Accounts Editor 4 42482 hek sale alae enna eee ada ea 47 6 4 4 The syst m Log VIWE ia 4Area s A eA aati lane 48 6 5 Configuration Fie LOCATIONS 22 on a E cxbaadd cous bacaebeda ceceub sen E EEE caceut lentes 49 6 5 1 General DeSCription i2 Ain eee ha NA Pine he ee el eee 49 6 5 2 Adding of a Configuration File LoCation ccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeesee
258. ration File Splitting Pre Trigger Post Trigger Disk Clean Up Disk Limitation No Enabled E E Drag drop the data which shall be stored from the MDS Explorer Save As Figure 49 SPE Binary T001 with a new Storage Profile e See point 6 9 for detailed information about the provided controls e Fora more detailed description of all available functionalities of the SPE Binary T001 refer to the refer ence manual of the Storage System chapter SPE Binary T001 Try it out gt Create a new Storage Profile gt Specify the desired data storage location gt Change the file splitting interval to 1 minute English Release 2012 09 106 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS gt Add some data names to the Data table Specify different storage modes for each of the to be stored data gt Save the Storage Profile At the first save the Save As dialog will pop up and offers a default file name Change the default file name to Hello Storage Profile for offline Data and press OK in order to save it to the disk The new Storage Profile now is displayed below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Storage Profile Files branch of the STS Explorer gt Take a look onto the Storage Profiles which are provided via the example location see point 6 5 in order to see various application examples about the capabilities and usage of S
259. read 85 Analyzing of Data via Analyzing SCripts cecccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceneeeeeseneaeeeeeneaeeeseeaaeeeteeaaeees 87 General DeSCIiption cccccceeceeeececceceeeeeeeesceaeeeceeeeeeeeceaaanaeceeeeesesecaeaeeeeeeeeaeeenieaeeeeeeeeeteee 87 Creation of a new Analyzing Script cece etter eee eeneee ee eineeeeeenieeeeetiieeeeesieeeestieeeeeee 87 Opening of existing Analyzing Scripts 0 ec eceeee cence eee eeneee ee teeeeetaeeeee teases taeeeeseeeeeer 90 Starting and Stopping of Analyzing Scripts cc eee eeeeee teeters ee eeieeeeeteeeee teaser tiaeeeeee 91 User Functions for the Encapsulation of Analysis TaskS cccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeenueeeeeeneeeeeeaes 92 General DESCHPUON s caze ces cocci eeceadectec ssezeSednapetecs anc aecelsinesatiedsh aden bin adaceess cree aunatameSoregeseamees 92 Creation of a new User FUNCUON icceccoueeceis secceetgiacdene apnugettid ceneatwoutetanabeugedtnd ececbieoetes he attend 92 5 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 15 3 6 15 4 6 15 5 6 15 6 6 15 7 6 16 6 16 1 6 16 2 6 17 6 17 1 6 17 2 6 18 6 18 1 6 18 2 6 18 3 6 18 4 6 19 6 19 1 6 19 2 6 19 3 6 19 4 6 20 6 20 1 6 20 2 6 21 6 21 1 6 21 2 6 22 6 22 1 6 22 2 6 22 3 6 22 4 6 23 6 23 1 6 23 2 6 23 3 6 24 6 24 1 6 24 2 6 24 3 6 25 6 25 1 English Release 2012 09 Opening of existing User FUNCTIONS eceeeeeteteeee teen ee ee et
260. rer An Analyzing Script Editor of proper type is opened automatically and displays the dropped Analyzing Script Analyzing Script Settings 5 Analyzing Script Parameters EJ Offline Time Configuration J Treatment of Status Codes main i var dSignal GenUF Sine 10 1 2 Signal dSignal ibsForSignal Abs dSignal Line 3 Column 5 Figure 40 ASE Standard T001 with an opened Analyzing Script e The opened Analyzing Script can be edited now After editing the Save and Save As buttons are used in order to save the edited Analyzing Script with all of its settings Try it out gt Open an existing Analyzing Script gt Enter another storage location and change the Script Description within the Analyzing Script Settings ta ble gt Add an additional function to the Analyzing Script and output also this additional result of the calculation gt Save the Analyzing Script via the Save button The modified Analyzing Script is still displayed below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Analyzing Script Files branch of the ANS Explorer Ready At this point you know how to open and modify an existing Analyzing Script English Release 2012 09 90 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 14 4 Starting and Stopping of Analyzing Scripts Open the ANS Explorer e Open the Analyzing System and ensure that the ANS Explorer is displayed at t
261. rl gets the current monitoring status and MaxBndAmp gets the maximal peaks of the base band and each band e fora better comparison between alarm spectra in case of signal power bands a derived spectrum can be output via OutSpm e there are additional output arguments for the visualization of alarm spectra peak or power Out e writes signals of simple data types Booleans Integers or decimals to the system so that it can be used by the other systems of X Tools OutB1D e writes data of data type 1 dimensional buffer to the system so that it can be used by the other systems of X Tools OutSpm e writes data of data type spectrum to the system so that it can be used by the other systems of X Tools 7 4 2 3 Example A concrete example is provided in order to show a real life application The hereby used Analyzing Model File similar to the above screenshot see MonAlrmSpm 01 can be found within the example location which is being delivered together with X Tools Input Spectrum In this example the input spectrum consists out of three added sine waves at different frequencies and with dif ferent amplitudes see screenshot below 1 Online Data with absolute Timestamps 2011 01 13 14 51 05 447 500 000 GMT 01 00 MonAlrmSpm 01 MondlrmSpm Figure 58 Example of the Input Spectrum for the Spectrum Monitoring English Release 2012 09 148 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 0
262. roduction SIPLUS CMS Analyzing Scripts found in Analyzing Script Files Measurement Tasks Loading of Data Name Description Basic Loading This Analyzing Script shows a very easy method for the loading of offline data from a cer tain directory Load Period of Time This Analyzing Script shows how to load a certain amount of time of the offline data from a certain directory Load with Loading Profile Loading Modes This Analyzing Scripts shows how to use Loading Profiles in order to load data with the available loading modes Load with Loading Profile Loading Times This Analyzing Script shows how to use Loading Profiles in order to load data with config uring of the to be loaded time intervals Load with Storage Profile Latest Files auto This Analyzing Script shows how to use LoadData in order to automatically load the matic latest offline data files of the specified Storage Profile Load with Storage Profile Latest Files once This Analyzing Script shows how to use LoadData in order to load the latest offline data files of the specified Storage Profile once Load with Storage Profile Period of Time This Analyzing Script shows how to load a certain amount of time of the offline data from a certain Storage Profile Storage Profiles found in Storage Profile Files Measurement Tasks Loading of Data Name Description IFN Al This Storage Profile stores the oline data from the simulated IFN Al Loading Profile
263. rvers YourServerName Files Default Location Analyzing Model Files right click with the mouse onto your saved Analyzing Model choose Start After the Analyzing Model has been started the X Tools Server initializes the configured calculations The calculated data appears within the MDS Explorer below Main Servers YourServerName Online Data or Offline Data All Online Data or All Offline Data From there the online or offline data can be used within all other systems of X Tools English Release 2012 09 35 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 Tutorials 6 1 General Description The following tutorials provide a fast and detailed overview about the key functionalities of X Tools They build on each other therefore it is strongly recommended to take a look onto them in the order in which they are pro vided in case of the first contact to the system However in case you already have some experience with the system you may find the one or the other tutorial useful in order to recall a certain functionality or handling In addition to this tutorial examples for all available configurations are delivered together with X Tools These examples are being found in a separated Configuration File location so that they can be enabled or disabled with only a few clicks at any time Take a look at point 6 5 in order to see how to enable or disable additiona
264. s 6 22 3 Configuring of the Data of interest Open the DMS Explorer e Open the Device Management System and ensure that the DMS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Device Management System workspace Functionality e Within the DMS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Interfaces gt OPC UA T001 branch e Click onto the connected OPC UA server with the right mouse button in order to open the context menu e Choose New Device Profile from the context menu o A DPE OPC UA T001 with a new empty Device Profile opens automatically e Within the Address Space table the current address space of the OPC UA server can be browsed The Add as Device Profile Input Data and Add as Device Profile Output Data context menu items can be used in order to configure any of the data of the OPC UA server to be used as input and or output data o The values of all data which are added to the Device Profile Input Data table become available as online data within the MDS Explorer after the Device Profile has been started o The values of all data which are added to the Device Profile Output Data table are being written cycli cly to the OPC UA server after the Device Profile has been started In order to define which values are to be written the online data which shall act as source for the to be sent values must be entered into the Assigned Data field e The Value field of the Device Profile Output Data table can be
265. s found in Loading Profile Files Measurement Tasks Loading of Data Name Description Loading Modes This Loading Profile configures the available loading modes for the loading of offline data Loading Times This Loading Profile configures different time intervals for the loading of offline data 7 4 8 Advanced parallel Storing 7 4 8 1 General This chapter shows how to configure a Storage Profile for applications where it is necessary to store the same data in parallel multiple times where each storage shall maintain its own data based start and stop triggers An example use case could be e There is a plant e g a steel mill with different sections e At any time multiple parts e g coils could be processed by the different sections of the plant e The Storage System shall produce one directory with offline data for each processed part This directory is started at the moment when the part enters the first section an according start trigger is caused at this moment and stopped at the moment when the part leaves the last section an according stop trigger is caused at this moment e When the start trigger occurs an ID which uniquely identifies the currently processed part the so called Storage ID shall be added as part of the directory name e Atthe moment when the plant is started there are no parts within the different sections Afterwards mul tiple parts may enter the plant multiple start events occur befor
266. s more convenient and faster as it automatically opens all windows e The following screenshot shows an example of a new Storage Profile O Storage Profile Settings Storage Profile Parameters Path and File Name Configuration File Splitting Start Event Stop Event Pre Trigger Post Trigger Disk Clean Up Disk Limitation o Enabled Drag drop the data which shall be stored from the MDS Explorer Save As Figure 30 SPE Binary T001 with a new Storage Profile e The Storage Profile Settings table at the top of the SPE Binary T001 displays the general file information and allows entering additional file attributes like a description and the name of the author of the file and his company e Within the Storage Profile Parameters table the time domain of the source data and the target location for the to be created offline data files are specified Any of the already defined offline data file locations can be chosen from the combo box of the Data Storage Location cell The entry from the Data Stor age Location cell of the Storage Profile Parameters table can be used in order to define a new offline data file location e Within the Subdirectory Creation table the granularity of the levels of the to be created directories can be configured e Within the File Splitting table the mode and the parameters of the file splitting can be configured e Within the Start Event t
267. s Server is started automatically and also the connection from the X Tools Client to the X Tools Server is being established automatically Thus the X Tools Client and the X Tools Server behave very much like a single application whenever the additional advantages of the client server architecture are not needed 3 1 2 1 2 X Tools Client The X Tools Client provides the user interface which is being used in order to configure any of the currently connected X Tools Servers The X Tools Client itself is being used exclusively for the configuration of the measurement system and for the visualization of the present online and offline data All of the actual measure ment and analysis tasks are being processed by the X Tools Server according to the made configuration Each X Tools Client can connect to multiple X Tools Servers at once in order to configure it and or to visualize its present online and offline data See point 8 1 for more details about the X Tools Client English Release 2012 09 15 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 3 1 2 1 3 X Tools Server The X Tools Server does not provide any user interface and is fully configured via one or more of the currently connected X Tools Clients In case there is not any X Tools Client attached to the X Tools Server at the mo ment it still continues to perform all of its measurement analysis and storage tasks Depending to the edition of the X Tools Server Demo
268. s been started through the X Tools Service either because of the config ured automated startup or because of the configured automated restart the X Too s Server runs in ses sion 0 e Multiple instances of the X Tools Tray application can be running under each operating system but there can be not more than one instance of the X Tools Tray per Windows session e The current Windows session of each running process can be seen within the Session ID column of the Processes tab of the Task Manager of Windows 7 1 2 Microsoft Windows XP Only one user can be logged in at Microsoft Windows XP at any time In case the option Use Fast User Switch ing is turned on within the user accounts setting of Windows multiple Windows sessions can be present simul taneously but still there can be only one user working with the system at any time In case the X Tools Server has been started by the X Tools Service it is running in session 0 When the X Tools Server has been started through the X Tools Service it keeps running even in case the user logs off from session 0 because session 0 is never closed Session 0 is the local console of Windows XP It can be reached by logging in to the machine via its local key board or by using of the admin or console command line parameter of Remote Desktop 7 1 3 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Multiple users can be logged in at and work within one Microsoft Windows Server 2003 machine s
269. s via an Offline Data Loader Examples of Storage Profiles are found within the example Configuration File location which is being delivered together with X Tools See also point 6 15 for information about how to store offline data via Storage Profiles This chapter contains the following topics e Creation of a new Storage Profile for online Data e Opening of existing Storage Profiles e Starting and Stopping of Storage Profiles 6 9 2 Creation of a new Storage Profile for online Data Open the STS Explorer e Open the Storage System and ensure that the STS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Storage System workspace e Ensure that you have several data available below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Online Data gt All Online Data branch of the MDS Explorer Functionality e Method 1 for the creation of a new Storage Profile o Within the STS Explorer expand the Main gt Editors gt Storage Profile Editors branch o Drag the SPE Binary T001 with the left mouse into the empty space at the right side of the STS Ex plorer An empty SPE Binary T001 is opened automatically o Press the New button in order to create a new Storage Profile The new Storage Profile is displayed by the SPE Binary T001 with default values o This method works in all cases even in case there is no X Tools Server connected at the moment It can be used for the creation and configuration of Storage Profiles for cases where
270. se 2012 09 173 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 8 Reference Part Overview 8 1 X Tools Client 8 1 1 Controls 8 1 1 1 Tables Tables are being used mainly for editing and configuration purposes The tables of the X Tools Client provide the following main functionalities e Context Menu e Keyboard Operations e Sizeable Columns e Shiftable Columns e Minimize and Maximize Context Menu The context menu of each table can be called via a click onto the title bar with the right mouse button The fol lowing context menu items are provided Context Menu Item Description Restore Column Defaults restores the default configuration of all columns as it is after the installation of X Tools AutoFit Column Widths automatically fits the width of all columns so that all contained texts are visible Show Hide gt allows to show or hide the columns of the table the provided sub menu contains all of the col umns of the table which can be shown or hidden by the user Autosize Table optimizes the width of all visible columns Minimize minimizes the table Maximize maximizes the table Keyboard Operations Different keyboard operations are supported depending to whether the table is in editing mode at the moment or not The following keyboard operations are provided in case the table is not in editing mode Keyboard Operation Description lt Del gt performs a rem
271. sed SIPLUS CMS components 3 2 2 Software e SIPLUS CMS X Tools arbitrary edition Note The usage of resource intensive applications e g remote backup and or anti virus software compiler simultaneously to X Tools can cause that there are not enough system resources working memory CPU time graphics power disk throughput network throughput available for the execution of X Tools As tasks like the acquiring of measurement values can be noticeable affected by low available system resources the avail able system resources must not be claimed entirely by other applications during the execution of X Tools The exact amount of resources working memory CPU time graphics power disk throughput network through put which are being needed by X Tools is dependent to the amount of attached devices and to the amount and size of the configured tasks The more data is to be acquired by X Tools simultaneously and the more other tasks analysis storing visualization are to be performed in parallel the more resources must be pro vided by the computer which is running X Tools In case of system overload proper system behavior can not be ensured Note In case the X Tools Client and the X Tools Server are running at different computers it is recommended to synchronize the system clocks of the used computers As X Tools does not use an internal mechanism for the time synchronization between X Tools Client and X To
272. sesecacaeeeeeeeeeseesisneeeess 161 Example of the Input Data for a Spectrum Envelope ccccccccceeceeeeeeeeecceeaeeeeeeeeeteccaeaeeeeeeeeeesenaees 162 Example of an Analyzing Model for the Creation of Spectrum Envelopes ccccceeeeeeseeeeeees 163 Example of the Input Data for a Spectrum Envelope together with the calculated Envelopes 164 Example of an Analyzing Model for the monitoring of the current online Spectrum 00 0 06 164 Example of an Analyzing Script for the monitoring of the current online Spectrum 165 Example of the Output of MonitorSpectrumEnvelope cccccccceeeeecceeeeeeeeeeseceecaeceeeeeeeseesnseeeaeess 165 Example of the Plant Simulation for the advanced parallel Storing c csecseccceeeeeeeteeeeneteeeeees 172 Example of a Tool Tip of the X TOOIS S rvell cccccccccccecceceeeeeeeeecceaeceeeeeeesecsacaeeeseeesetenseaaeees 178 X Tools Server Status Dialog ccccccccccceeeeeeeeee ee eiee ee ee ene ee eee ie ee ee tees ee tieeeeee teases tiieeeeesieeeeeeaa 179 Release 2012 09 11 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 1 Preface 1 1 Purpose of this Document This document provides an introduction about the functionalities and usage of the software e SIPLUS CMS X Tools of the SIPLUS CMS product line In addition to the introduction which is found within this document and which provides an overview about the av
273. sh Release 2012 09 155 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 7 4 5 X Y Envelopes 7 4 5 1 General This chapter shows how to use the Analyzing System in order to create x y envelopes how to visualize the calculated envelopes and how to use them for monitoring of current online data against violation of these enve lopes The visualizations Analyzing Models and Analyzing Scripts from this chapter can be tried out because the input data and the Analyzing Models Analyzing Scripts are delivered together with X Tools The input data is found within the Server User Example Offline Files X Tools Offline Data Files Measurement Tasks XY Envelopes path of the X Tools installation and must be loaded from there whereas the used Analyzing Models Analyzing Scripts and Monitoring Views are part of the example location which is delivered together with X Tools The Measurement Tasks XY Envelopes subdirectory of each Configuration File type contains the Configuration Files to which the following descriptions refer see also point 7 4 5 6 The provided input data has been created by storing of the output of the 10 Create Reference x and y Data Analyzing Model from the example location For the generation of online x and y data which also shows viola tions of the calculated envelopes the 40 Simulate x and y Data with Errors Analyzing Model Analyzing Script from the example location must be start
274. ss Modules with the right mouse button in order to open the context menu o Inorder to open the ODL Standard T001 choose Load Offline Data from the context menu The ODL Standard T001 is opened and its Offline Data Files tree automatically displays the available offline data file locations of the X Tools Server from which the context menu has been called English Release 2012 09 69 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS e The following screenshot shows an example of an opened ODL Standard T001 Offline File Locations CMS 2000 Date Structure Offline Data Files S A YOURSERVER Offline Files Offline Files CSV S E Example Offline Files sdf xts Sg ION Analoglnput T0017 Sef 20090604 Beefy 122306 ION Analoglnput T001 CHO1 ION Analoglnput T001 CHO2 ION Analoglnput T001 CHO3 ION Analoginput T001 CHO4 5 ION Analoglnput T001 CHOS ION Analoglnput T001 CHO6 ION Analoglnput T001 CHO ION Analoglnput T001 CHOS Sg ION Binarylnput T001 gy Order Analysis fy Rectangle G Log Entries Apply Cancel Loading Figure 32 ODL Standard T001 with some Offline Data Files e The Offline File Locations table at the top of the ODL Standard T001 displays the symbolic names and absolute paths of the available offline data file locations e The CM2000 Date Structure table allows to specify the depth of the date structure which shall be shown for CMS2000 files e The
275. sualization between online data and offline data and how to visualize and use online and offline data in parallel English Release 2012 09 80 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 13 Analyzing of Data via Analyzing Models 6 13 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn how to analyze data from the MDS Explorer with the Analyzing System via Ana lyzing Models An Analyzing Model contains all of the information which is needed in order to perform calcula tions based on the specified input data This information includes the order of execution and the parameters of all to be called Analyzing and User functions Multiple Analyzing Models can be started and running simulta neously at any time In addition the data which are defined as output data within a started Analyzing Model are available to all other modules of X Tools via the MDS Explorer Examples of Analyzing Models are found within the example Configuration File location which is being delivered together with X Tools This chapter contains the following topics e Creation of a new Analyzing Model e Opening of existing Analyzing Models e Starting and Stopping of Analyzing Models 6 13 2 Creation of a new Analyzing Model Open the ANS Explorer e Open the Analyzing System and ensure that the ANS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Ana lyzing System workspace e Ensure that you have several data available below the Main
276. t Servers gt YourServer items from the MMS Explorer can be dragged into the empty System Log Viewer in order to start viewing of the system log of the X Tools Server e Fora more detailed description of all available functionalities of the System Log Viewer refer to the ref erence manual of the Main Management System chapter System Log Viewer Functionality e The System Log Settings table at the top of the System Log Viewer displays some general information about the currently displayed log entries and allows to define filters in order to configure which system log entries shall be displayed and which ones not e Within the System Log Entries table all of the log entries from the currently chosen sources and which match the currently configured filters are being displayed e The Apply button is used in order to take over the changes which have been made within the System Log Settings table e Incase the X Tools Client or any of the currently connected X Tools Servers is being dragged into a non empty System Log Viewer the system log entries of the dragged item are added to the currently displayed system log entries o lt Shift gt can be used when releasing the mouse button in order to replace the currently displayed sys tem log entries with the system log entries of the dragged item and to determine the currently dragged item as the one and only source for to be displayed system log entries Try it out gt Open t
277. t Tasks Loading of Data IFN Al spf xts wn Overwrite Each Value Load Latest Files The Monitoring View Automatic Update of the t Axes from the example location can be used in order to see how the loaded offline data is taken over automatically by a Monitoring View In order to enable the automatic update of the Monitoring View the option Rescale t Axes after Action must be configured to Yes either within the Chart Options dialog or via the context menu of each t axis 7 4 7 9 Summary The following Configuration Files are being used by this chapter Interface Profiles found in lnterface Profile Files Measurement Tasks Loading of Data Name Description Simulation T001 This Interface Profile enables the simulated devices which are being used for the genera tion of the to be stored data Device Profiles found in Device Profile Files Measurement Tasks Loading of Data Name Description IFN Al This Device Profile provides the online data from a simulated IFN Al Monitoring Views found in Monitoring View Files Measurement Tasks Loading of Data Name Description Automatic Update of the t Axes This Monitoring View is configured to automatically update its Monitoring Charts when ever LoadData has loaded the latest files of the currently running Storage Profile again English Release 2012 09 170 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Int
278. tWait execute the desired calculations in parallel Start Sequence Control Sequence Control 02 amf xts DoNotWait Start Sequence Control Sequence Control 03 asf xts DoNotWait wait until both calculations have finished WaitForCF Sequence Control Sequence Control 02 amf xts Stopped WaitForCF Sequence Control Sequence Control 03 asf xts Stopped store the calculated data Start Sequence Control 02 spf xts Wait stop the Device Profiles Stop ION VIB A TO001 dpf xts Stop IFN VIB ACC dpf xts stop the Interface Profile Stop Simulation T001 ipf xts remove the calculated data RemoveData Sequence Control Sequence Control 02 amf xts RemoveData Sequence Control Sequence Control 03 asf xts English Release 2012 09 114 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS e resolving of dependencies between analyzing tasks var PerformDependentCalculations start the Interface Profile which enables the simulated devices Start Simulation TO01 ipf xts DoNotWait start the Device Profiles of the simulated devices Start ION VIB A TO01 dpf xts DoNotWait Start IFN VIB ACC dpf xts DoNotWait execute the desired calculations in parallel Start Sequence Control Sequence Control 02 amf xts DoNotWait while IsDataPrsnt Add false wait un
279. taPrsnt Exit English allows to check whether the specified data is currently present within X Tools this Analyzing Function can be used in order to verify the execution during the processing of a measure ment and analyzing task it also can be used in order to wait until a certain data becomes available e g in case there are analyzing tasks which are depend from each other one Analyzing Model Script bases on the data which has been calculated by a previous Analyzing Model Script the IsDataPrsnt 01 Analyzing Script within the example location shows another example about how to use this Analyzing Function allows to stop the execution of the Analyzing Model or Analyzing Script which calls this Analyzing Func tion this Analyzing Function can be used in order to stop an Analyzing Model or Analyzing Script which calls it e g in case a certain condition is reached the Exit 01 and Exit 02 Analyzing Scripts as well as the Exit 01 and Exit 02 Analyzing Models within the example location show other examples about how to use this Analyzing Function Release 2012 09 112 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 19 4 Example The Sequence Control directory of the Analyzing Scripts within the example location contains the Analyzing Script Sequence Control 01 This Analyzing Script shows different examples for the execution of automated measurement and analysis tasks
280. tall a driver for the new device For the installation the following sub path of your installation directory has to be provided to the hardware wizard of Windows SIPLUS CMS Drivers lIEEE1394 IEEE1394 IONs and IFNs are detected by X Tools automatically after the driver installation and can be used by X Tools immediately 4 2 4 How to connect Ethernet IONs to the PC Ethernet Cable In order to connect an Ethernet ION to X Tools an Ethernet cable must be plugged between the used PC and the JON Ethernet standard networking devices like switches and or hubs can be used between the PC and the ION as well Power Supply The SIPLUS CMS part of current Ethernet ONs is limited to a piece of software which is installed on a corre sponding hardware Therefore the hardware of Ethernet JONs is non SIPLUS CMS and has its own power sup ply instructions Driver Installation There is no driver installation needed for Ethernet JONs Instead Ethernet JONs have to be announced manu ally to X Tools after they have been attached and before they can be used The Interface Profile Editor for the socket interface see IPE Socket T001 must be used for the configuration of connections to Ethernet JONs English Release 2012 09 32 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 4 2 5 How to connect USB CTNs to the PC USB Cable In order to connect a USB CTN to the used PC a USB cable must be plugged between the used PC an
281. tarted e g in case the input data is not available at the moment or in case the output data can not be created because it is in use already When an Analyzing Script can not run after it has been started it is being suspended and automatically resumed as soon as the error condition has disappeared e Incase at least one Analyzing Script has been started by the user the status bar of the X Tools Client displays the current status of Analyzing Scripts via the according colored icon The tool tip of this icon provides detailed information about the number of currently started and suspended Analyzing Scripts o Note that the status bar always displays the status of exactly one X Tools Server thus also the icon for the current status of Analyzing Scripts displays the status of only the currently chosen X Tools Server Try it out gt Start an existing Analyzing Script Ensure that the configured input data is available within the MDS Ex plorer and that the configured output data does not exist within the MDS Explorer yet The output data which has been configured within the started Analyzing Script becomes available within the MDS Explorer gt Stop the currently running Analyzing Script The data which has been configured within the started Analyzing Script is being removed from the MDS Explorer Ready At this point you know how to start and stop existing Analyzing Scripts in order to start and stop the calculations based on the curre
282. tchGuard T001 V 02 05 EN 0006 n a In case your device reports an older firmware version it must be updated to the latest available version Detailed information about how to update the firmware of devices is obtained from your local Siemens office and from the homepage http www siemens com siplus cms Note Devices with an older firmware version than above may also work properly However older firmware versions are not tested any more together with the latest version of X Tools thus it is always suggested to use the latest available version of all device firmware together with the current version of X Tools English Release 2012 09 34 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction Quick Reference SIPLUS CMS Start the X Tools Client x d The X Tools Server is being started automatically oN Configure to which devices the X Tools Server shall connect via its interfaces lt d IEEE1394 devices are detected automatically after the driver installation socket TCP or UDP devices are configured via the IPE Socket T001 open the DMS Device Management System within the DMS Explorer expand Main Servers YourServerName Interfaces right click with the mouse onto Socket T001 choose New Interface Profile configure your desired connections press Save within the Interface Profile Editor within the DMS Explorer expand Main Serv
283. the X Tools Server during its Runtime The X Tools Service can monitor whether the X Tools Server is running properly In order to enable this func tionality the Automated Restart option from the global options of the X Tools Server must be configured to Automatically restart the X Tools Server in case it stops to operate normally Enabling of this option installs the X Tools Service which becomes visible within the Services dialog of Win dows then While the monitoring is active the X Tools Service constantly checks whether the X Tools Server is still re sponsive In case the X Tools Server does not respond for a too long time the X Tools Service kills the proc ess of the X Tools Server and starts a new instance of the X Tools Server After such an event the X Tools Server will start up in safe mode 8 4 4 Stopping of the X Tools Service The X Tools Service is being stopped by the X Tools Service in case none of the above functionalities is needed The X Tools Service also is being stopped in case the X Tools Service is being shut down manually by the user While the X Tools Server is running and in case the X Tools Service is enabled via the global options the X Tools Server also monitors the X Tools Service and attempts to start it whenever it does not run therefore the X Tools Service always must be stopped via the global options of the X Tools Server a manual attempt to stop the X Tools Service will not work in most cases
284. the configured to be stored data is available within the MDS Explorer The data which has been configured within the started Storage Profile is being stored to the specified data storage location gt Stop the currently running Storage Profile All of the currently opened offline data files are being closed Ready At this point you know how to start and stop existing Storage Profiles in order to start and stop the storing of online data into offline data files English Release 2012 09 68 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 10 Loading of Data and Loading Profiles 6 10 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn how to load offline data from the disk with the Storage System with a simple method and via Loading Profiles A Loading Profile contains all of the information which is needed in order to load data from a storage location This information includes among others the names of the to be loaded data the desired loading intervals and the desired period of time Examples of Loading Profiles are found within the example Configuration File location which is being delivered together with X Tools This chapter contains the following topics e Simple Loading of Offline Data e Creation of a new Loading Profile e Opening of existing Loading Profiles e Starting and Stopping of Loading Profiles e Advanced Loading of Offline Data 6 10 2 Simple Loading of Offline Data Open the STS Explor
285. the new version of X Tools has been installed e Start the new installation of X Tools wait until everything has been initialized and close X Tools after wards During this first start X Tools prepares the basic directory structures which are needed for the fol lowing steps English Release 2012 09 29 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Copy the following files from the earlier installation of X Tools to the corresponding directories of the new installation overwrite all files which exist in the target directory already o AClient User Basic Settings Global Options gof xtc o AClient User Basic Settings Global Settings gsf xtc o AClient User Basic Settings Layout lyt xtc o AClient User Default Location o Server User Basic Settings Data Categories dcf xts o A Server User Basic Settings Global Options gof xts o Server User Basic Settings User Accounts uaf xts o Server User Default Location o A Server User Offline Files Be sure that the following files are not being copied they contain absolute path information and therefore they won t work within the changed new directory o AClient User Basic Settings File Locations flf xtc o A Server User Basic Settings File Locations flf xts In case additional locations for Configuration Files or Offline Data where specified within the earlier instal lation of X Tools the same locations also must be added manually to the
286. the ring buffer size can be configured for each data individually see the reference manual for more detailed information about these parameters In addition all output Analyzing Functions within Analyzing Models and Analyzing Scripts also allow to configure individual ring buffer sizes On 32 bit operationg systems the X Tools Server can not allocate more than 2 or 3 GBytes of working memory So even in case more GBytes are installed in the used machine only 2 or 3 GBytes can be used by the X Tools Server However in case more GBytes of working memory are installed other ap plications can use this additional memory and the full 2 or 3 GBytes may be available to the X Tools Server o By default 32 bit operating systems provide a maximum of 2 GBytes of working memory to each ap plication In order to increase the available working memory to 3 GBytes follow the steps from the be low links Windows XP and Server 2003 a see http msdn microsoft com en us library windows hardware ff556232 v vs 85 aspx Windows 7 Open a command prompt with admistrator rights a enter bcdedit set IncreaseUserVa 3072 and run this command a restart the computer a see also http technet microsoft com en us query ff542202 The X Tools Server can benefit from the increased working memory size only in case this amount of memory is also present as physically installed RAM and it is not consumed by other applications In addition to the acquir
287. the target X Tools Server is not present at the moment e Method 2 for the creation of a new Storage Profile o Within the STS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Libraries gt Storage Process Modules branch o Click onto the present STE SPM Binary T001 with the right mouse button in order to open the context menu o Inorder to create a new Storage Profile for the storage format Binary T001 choose New Storage Profile from the context menu o This method works only in case the target X Tools Server is present but it is more convenient and faster as it automatically also determines the target X Tools Server of the new Storage Profile English Release 2012 09 64 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS e Method 3 for the creation of a new Storage Profile o Within the MDS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Online Data gt All Online Data branch o Drag amp Drop the desired target data into the empty Storage System The SPE Binary T001 is opened automatically a new Storage Profile is being initialized with default values and the dropped data is added to Data table As online data is being dropped the Time Domain cell within the Storage Profile Parameters table is being set to Online Data with absolute Timestamps automatically o This method works only in case the target X Tools Server and the target data are present but it i
288. til the data Add becomes available Start Sequence Control Sequence Control 04 asf xts DoNotWait wait until both calculations have finished WaitForCF Sequence Control Sequence Control 02 amf xts Stopped WaitForCF Sequence Control Sequence Control 04 asf xts Stopped stop the Device Profiles Stop ION VIB A TO01 dpf xts Stop IFN VIB ACC dpf xts stop the Interface Profile Stop Simulation T001 ipf xts remove the calculated data RemoveData Sequence Control Sequence Control 02 amf xts RemoveData Sequence Control Sequence Control 04 asf xts The following listing contains the main loop of the example Analyzing Script Sequence Control 01 var main while 1 run our three different measurement and analyzing tasks forever PerformSequentialCalculations PerformParallelCalculations PerformDependentCalculations Try it out gt Start the Analyzing Script Sequence Control 01 from the example location Files Example Loca tion Analyzing Script Files Sequence Control 01 gt See how the different Configuration Files are being started and stopped gt Check the offline data which is being stored by each execution of the measurement and analyzing tasks Add your own functionality to the participating Configuration Files in order try out additional possibilities Ready At this point you know
289. time configuration o Fora detailed description of the meaning and usage of the offline time configuration of Analyzing Models refer to the reference manual of the Analyzing System chapter Analyzing Model Editors e Within the Treatment of Status Codes table the handling of occurring status codes is being defined o The default configuration of Analyzing Models typically allows executing the defined analysis without additional changes to the treatment of status codes o Fora detailed description of the meaning and usage of the treatment of status codes of Analyzing Models refer to the reference manual of the Analyzing System chapter Analyzing Model Editors e In order to add input data to the Analyzing Model simply drag the desired data from the MDS Explorer into the Analyzing Model e In order to add Analyzing Functions to the Analyzing Model simply drag the desired Analyzing Function from the ANS Explorer into the Analyzing Model e In order to add User Functions to the Analyzing Model simply drag the desired User Function from the ANS Explorer into the Analyzing Model e Analyzing and User functions can be connected together via links Each output of a function can be con nected to one or more inputs of functions by clicking onto the output argument first and by clicking onto the input argument next Each created link transports the output value from its source function to the input argument of its destina
290. tion function e All of the currently present functions can be arranged within the Analyzing Model via Drag amp Drop e A double click onto a function opens the Analyzing Function Properties dialog which can be used in or der to specify the values of the input arguments of the function e Via the context menu functions can be cut copied pasted removed and their visualization can be modi fied e An Analyzing Model can work either only on online data only on offline data or on online and offline data simultaneously The class of the resulting data online or offline can be configured via the Analyzing Model Parameters table e Analyzing Functions from the category Input are being used in order to get online or offline data from the system into the Analyzing Model Analyzing Functions from the category Output are being used in order to put online or offline data from the Analyzing Model back to the system e The Save and Save As buttons are used in order to save the configured Analyzing Model with all of its settings All saved Analyzing Models are shown by the ANS Explorer Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Analyzing Model Files branch and can be accessed e g started stopped opened from there e Fora more detailed description of all available functionalities of the AME Standard T001 and of the available Analyzing Functions refer to the reference manual of the Analyzing System
291. title bar of a window which is in full screen mode also brings the win dow back to its original size Figure 18 Restore Button e The Maximize button can be used in order to maximize a window within its workspace Alternatively a double click onto the title bar of a window which is not maximized also maximizes the window within its workspace Figure 19 Maximize Button e Incase a window is maximized within its workspace the Restore button can be used in order to bring the window back to its original size Alternatively a double click onto the title bar of a window which is maxi mized within its workspace also brings the window back to its original size e The size of each window can be changed via Drag amp Drop In order to change the size of a window click onto the border or an edge of the window with the left mouse button and keep the mouse button pressed while moving the mouse cursor During the mouse move a light frame shows the new size which the window would get when the mouse button is released e The position of each window can be moved via Drag amp Drop In order to move a window to another place within its workspace click onto the title bar of the window with the left mouse button and keep the mouse button pressed while moving the mouse cursor During the mouse move a light frame shows where the dragged window would be dropped when the mouse button is released e The detailed behavior of each window can be configured via the
292. tly into not editing mode lt Enter gt takes over the changed value and puts the cell which owns the input focus currently into not editing mode lt Backspace gt puts the cell which owns the input focus currently into editing mode and clears its current value lt Cursor left gt moves the input focus left to the next editable cell of the same row lt Cursor right gt moves the input focus right to the next editable cell of the same row lt Cursor up gt moves the input focus up to the next editable cell of the same column lt Cursor down gt moves the input focus down to the next editable cell of the same column lt Tab gt jumps from the current cell to the next editable cell at the right side lt Shift gt lt Tab gt jumps from the current cell to the next editable cell at the left side Sizeable Columns The user is able to change the width of each column through a left mouse click in between the title cells of two columns Through moving of the mouse the width of the left column can be changed as long as the left mouse button is kept pressed Shiftable Columns The user is able to change the position of columns among each other through a left mouse click into the title cell of a column Trough moving the mouse into between the title cells of two other columns the dragged column can be put to its new position In case the dragged column is released outside of its parent table the
293. to the present Monitoring Charts and change the scaling of some of the present axes gt Save the Monitoring View via the Save button The modified Monitoring View is still displayed below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Monitoring View Files branch of the MTS Explorer Ready At this point you know how to open and modify an existing Monitoring View English Release 2012 09 63 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 8 4 Starting and Stopping of Monitoring Views Monitoring Views can not be started or stopped Instead each Monitoring View starts to visualize the configured data according to the configured settings immediately when it is being opened and stops the visualization im mediately when it is being closed 6 9 Storage of online Data via Storage Profiles 6 9 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn how to store online data from the MDS Explorer with the Storage System via Storage Profiles A Storage Profile for online data contains all of the information which is needed in order to perform the storage of online data to a storage location This information includes among others the names of the to be stored data paths trigger settings and clean up settings Multiple Storage Profiles can be started and running simultaneously at any time The online data which is being stored by a running Storage Profile can be loaded as offline data afterward
294. together with X Tools contains a few examples of User Functions For each User Function there are also examples of Analyzing Models and Analyzing Scripts available e Convl16ToB o Description Shows how to convert a single 16 bit Integer into 16 single bits o Example Analyzing Models Conversion Convl16ToB 01 online data Conversion Convl16ToB 02 offline data o Example Analyzing Scripts Conversion Convl16ToB 01 online data Conversion Convl16ToB 02 offline data o Example Monitoring Views Example for Convl16ToB a This Monitoring View shows the online and offline output of the Analyzing Models and Analyzing Scripts e MyFFT o Description o Shows how to create a User Function which embeds all functionality for calculating of standardized FFTs o Example Analyzing Models Spectral MyFFT 01 online data o Example Analyzing Scripts Spectral MyFFT 01 online data e MyRMS o Description o Example Analyzing Models Statistic MyRMS 01 online data o Example Analyzing Scripts Statistic MyRMS 01 online data English Release 2012 09 104 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 16 Storage of offline Data via Storage Profiles 6 16 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn how to store offline data from the MDS Explorer with the Storage System via Storage Profiles for offline data A Storage Profile for offline data contains all of the information which is neede
295. torage Profiles Ready At this point you know how to create a new Storage Profile which can be used in order to store offline data to the disk 6 17 3D Visualization 6 17 1 General Description In this chapter you will learn how to visualize 2 dimensional data from the MDS Explorer with the 3D functional ity of the Monitoring System Several Analyzing Functions provide the results of their calculations as 2 dimensional data In order to visualize 2 dimensional data over the time the 3D functionality of the Monitoring System is being used This chapter contains the following topics e Visualization of Data in 3D 6 17 2 Visualization of Data in 3D Provide some 2 dimensional Data e Open the Analyzing System and ensure that the ANS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Ana lyzing System workspace e Ensure that the example location is present as one of the current locations see point 6 5 2 for how to add an additional location e From the example location start the Analyzing Model H2D 01 which is found below the sub folder Sta tistic After this Analyzing Model has been started the online data H2DForSignal appears within the MDS Explorer Functionality e Open the Monitoring System e Within the MDS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Online Data gt All Online Data branch e Drag amp Drop a 2 dimensional data into the empty Monitoring System The MVE Standard
296. ts Trigger table can be configured in order to cover dif ferent scenarios e Scenario 1 o The report shall be created m only once m assoon as the value of the online data Report Trigger is above 100 m with a delay of 5 seconds o The configuration within the Automatic Reports Trigger table can be as follows Parameter Value Trigger Mode Once Time Domain Trigger Data Name Online Data with absolute Timestamps Report Trigger Trigger Type Threshold Threshold Type Value gt Threshold Threshold Value 100 Capture Delay Format s Capture Delay Value 5 e Scenario 2 o The report shall be created m repeating m as soon as the value of the online data Report Trigger is between 50 and 100 m with a hysteresis of 10 a with a delay of 5 seconds o The configuration within the Automatic Reports Trigger table can be as follows Parameter Value Trigger Mode Repeating Time Domain Online Data with absolute Timestamps Trigger Data Name Report Trigger Trigger Type Interval Interval Type Inside Interval Lower Limit 50 Upper Limit 100 Capture Delay Format s Capture Delay Value 5 English Release 2012 09 124 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS e Scenario 3 o The report shall be created m repeating m as soon as the binary onli
297. ttnnsstennsstnnn 120 Using of the built in OPC UA Servet ccc tiaia Aa RNE A AAA ARR AAA aie iaa 121 Creation of Screenshots out of the Monitoring System sssesesssesrseseerresseerrssrerrssrrrnssrernsssees 121 General Deser iO a eed ad ete ea eed A aE 121 Printing Of Screenshot iarriko orini eitia oria Aei ae irian 121 Saving oS Creen shat riaa E EE OEA T ETE E T 122 Creation of Automatic Reports out of the Monitoring System essseseeesseerreseerrsserrrssrerrssseens 122 Generali DESCHIPUON a eters tz cheat eaaa bt dese anaceedie aaia a Mut E NAE a EA AaS ANE 122 6 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 25 2 IMpOrmantUE acts ies ite telat fe EEE PO ie nena abe EE E ie bese ean Tan He tee ang 122 6 25 3 Creation of a Monitoring View for automatic Reports 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaees 123 6 25 4 Trigger Example Sarei eae etlne r EES 124 6 25 5 Example Configuration Files rorieiri reiini deiri eieae ai e EAEE T 125 6 26 Creation of Reports of Analyzing Models eeeseeseeeseeneserrsssttrrssrtrrssttnnssttnnnsttnnssttnnnnstennneena 126 6 26 1 General DeESCrPUON sms aaae Mam a Asa aves Ass A ae a apia ati aieeaa 126 6 26 2 aaletelate laet a A E E rir earner A E E E E A ee cere frre eee 127 6 26 3 Printing ota Report enhao enr iion aao aeania EEEa NEENA AA LEEA EE EE A 127 6 26 4 Saving Of a Repor a eee deseo ees Cierra NEAN AENA Naia Karina aea Aina Ana Karina ANAA Eina AEA N 127
298. ues English Release 2012 09 41 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Main Profile Settings Default Location Creation Date N A Modification Date N A 5 Profile Description 6 Company Name Author Name Connections No Enabled Target IP or Name Command Port DataPort UserName Password Password confirm my oO Save As Figure 21 MPE Standard T001 with a new Main Profile e The Main Profile Settings table at the top of the MPE Standard T001 displays the general file information and allows entering additional file attributes like a description and the name of the author of the file and his company e Within the Connections table the actual connections to X Tools Servers are configured In order to con figure a new connection simple insert the IP address to the target X Tools Server into the IP Address field When a connection to the X Tools Server at the local computer shall be established 127 0 0 1 can be entered as IP address e By default the values from the other columns of the Connections table do not need to be modified o Incase the X Tools Server has been configured to use different command and data ports these other command and data ports must be entered instead of the default ones e Incase the anonymous access has been disabled at the X Tools Server the proper values for the User Name Password and Password confirm must be provided via the accordi
299. uspends The following table shows which license keys are required for the different software I O Nodes Software I O node Needed license Keys SIPLUS CMS4000 ION SIMATIC S7 PN ION SIMATIC S7 PN SIPLUS CMS4000 ION SIMATIC S7 300 T001 ION SIMATIC S7 300 SIPLUS CMS4000 ION SIMATIC S7 400 T001 ION SIMATIC S7 400 SIPLUS CMS4000 ION SIMOTION T001 ION SIMOTION SIPLUS CMS4000 ION SIMATIC TDC T001 ION SIMATIC TDC The whole license key management is handled by the software Automation License Manager It is a standard Siemens product and needs to be installed on the local computer It contains the functionalities of transferring saving and checking the license keys For further information regarding to the Automation License Manager the included HTML or context sensitive help can be used English Release 2012 09 21 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 4 Automation License Manager SIE xj File Edit License Key view Help E3 amp Eg X E X i ii de Jlicense keys x My Computer H 314 Floppy 4 g System C g Backup D 49 Web License Key Downl w ol S Family Product SIPLUS CMS4000 ION SIMATIC 57 PN SIPLUS CMS4000 ION SIMATIC 57 PN SIPLUS CMS4000 ION SIMOTION SIPLUS CM54000 ION SIMOTION SIPLUS CM54000 ION SIMATIC 57 400 SIPLUS CM54000 ION SIMATIC 57 400 SIPLUS CM54000 ION SIMATIC TDC SIPLUS CMS4000 ION SIMATIC TDC SIPLUS CM54000 ION
300. vailable Components Target Path The Setup checks if the required software modules for X Tools are already installed on the local computer If a requirement is missing the Setup will offer to install it English Release 2012 09 23 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction Missing requirements could be e Siemens Automation License Manager e Microsoft Visual C Redistributables e Microsoft DirectX e Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 SIPLUS CMS Choosing X Tools Client and or X Tools Server will copy the selected X Tools components to the specified Target Path With enabling the Advanced Installation Options it is possible to specify which plug ins shall be installed ie SIPLUS CMS4000 Setup Advanced Installation Options Available Plug Ins Available Plug Ins V Devices CTN WatchGuard T001 IFN ANALOGINPUT IFN IB ACC ION AnalogInput T001 ION ARCNET Spy T001 ION BinaryInput T001 ION C531 Spy T001 ION PROFIBUS DP Spy T001 ION PROFIBUS DP T001 ION SIMATIC 57 ION SIMATIC TDC T001 After leaving the Installation Options the process of installation starts m Previous Cancel Figure 6 Advanced Installation Options While installing the missing requirements follow the instructions of the specific installation routine in order to ensure that every requirement is installed correctly Installing Microsoft R DirecB lt R Welcome to setup for DirectX T
301. vice Profile Editor and via the input arguments of all output Analyzing Functions e There may be a huge amount of offline data being loaded at the moment It may be possible to remove the offline data which is not needed any more from the MDS Explorer e Incase the used system provides less than 4 GByte of physical working memory RAM additional work ing memory can be installed English Release 2012 09 144 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 7 4 Measurement Tasks 7 4 1 Frequency Analysis 7 4 1 1 General This chapter shows how to use the Analyzing System in order to analyze data via a frequency analysis For the calculation of a frequency spectrum the Fast Fourier Transform can be used which is an algorithm to transform a signal from the time domain into the frequency domain 7 4 1 2 Analyzing Model The following screenshot shows an example of an Analyzing Model for the calculation of a frequency spectrum Analyzing Model Settings 35 Analyzing Model Parameters EJ Offline Time Configuration J Treatment of Status Codes FFTFor Signal Open Convert Close Figure 54 Example of an Analyzing Model for a Frequency Analysis In e reads the signal from the system and provides it to the following Analyzing Functions Bffr e creates an 1 dimensional buffer with defined size NoP Number of Points must be 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 or 65536 FFT
302. visualize the data which is being provided by the X Tools Server Of course there are much more possibilities available refer to the reference manual of the Main Management System chapter User Accounts Editor in order to receive detailed information about the available access rights The X Tools Server does not protect the current configuration of access rights in any special way and stores all settings into a simple Configuration File Server User Basic Settings User Accounts uaf xts In case the ac cess rights shall be used for security relevant applications where a user without the according rights must not have any way to assign additional rights to himself the access to this Configuration File must be limited This can be done through standard mechanisms of Windows e g by not allowing the Windows user to access the file which implies that the X Tools Server and the X Tools Client are running from different Windows user accounts and or on different computers and has not been re implemented by the X Tools Server In case the X Tools Server is being configured to be started automatically before a user logs in to Windows an according service the X Tools Service is being used This service appears like all other services within the Services application of Windows see Start gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services In order to change the Windows user which is being used to start
303. was released for Micro soft Windows 7 Therefore proper system behavior of all other series of SIMATIC PCs together with Microsoft Windows 7 can not be ensured Note The Configuration Files and historical data of X Tools versions before V 03 00 can not be used by X Tools V 03 05 directly Detailed information about how to migrate from earlier versions is obtained from your local Sie mens office and from the homepage http www siemens com siplus cms 3 3 License Management There are three editions of the X Tools Server available Demo Standard and Professional The main function alities of these editions are Edition Maximal Clients Remarks SIPLUS CMS X Tools Professional 16 basic and advanced Analyzing Functions SIPLUS CMS X Tools Standard 1 only basic Analyzing Functions SIPLUS CMS X Tools Demo 1 only basic Analyzing Functions the demo edition can not connect to real IEEE1394 serial port or socket devices thus it is not possible to acquire real measurement data The reference of Analyzing Functions describes the functionality of each Analyzing Function in detail and points out whether it is a basic or an advanced Analyzing Function During its startup the X Tools Server checks the present license keys and starts up accordingly as Demo Standard or Professional edition The following table shows which license keys are required for the different editions of the X Tools Server
304. xisting Fast Analysis Script gt Enter another storage location and change the Script Description within the Analyzing Script Settings ta ble gt Add an additional function to the Fast Analysis Script and output also this additional result of the calcula tion gt Save the Fast Analysis Script via the Save button The modified Fast Analysis Script is still displayed below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLo cation gt Analyzing Script Files branch of the ANS Explorer Ready At this point you know how to open and modify an existing Fast Analysis Script 6 27 5 Using of Fast Analysis Scripts Open the MDS Explorer e Ensure that you have several data available below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Online Data gt All Online Data and Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Offline Data gt All Offline Data branches of the MDS Explorer e Ensure that you have some Fast Analysis Scripts with an Output Data Class of Online Data and some Fast Analyzing Scripts with an Output Data Class of Offline Data available within a Fast Analysis loca tion English Release 2012 09 130 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS Functionality e Within the MDS Explorer call the context menu from an online data and choose any of the sub items of the Fast Analysis context menu item e The Fast Analysis Status dialog opens automatically and
305. y1 1 000 Each Value Decimal32 YO x1 x0 0 000 y0 0 000 x1 1 000 y1 1 000 Each Value Decimal32 YO x1 x0 0 000 y0 0 000 x1 1 000 y1 1 000 Each Value Decimal32 y0 x1 x0 0 000 y0 0 000 x1 1 000 y1 1 000 Each Value gt aaaaaaanE lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Device Profile Parameters INo Parameter 4 CHO1 Sample Time s CHO2 Sample Time s ma CHO3 Sample Time s CHO4 Sample Time s 5 CHOS Sample Time s 6 CHOE Sample Time s CHO Sample Time s 8 CHO8 Sample Time s Save s Figure 27 DPE ION AnalogInput T001 with an opened Device Profile e The opened Device Profile can be edited now After editing the Save and Save As buttons are used in order to save the edited Device Profile with all of its settings Try it out gt Open an existing Device Profile gt Enter another Target Device Name and change the Profile Description within the Device Profile Settings table gt Save the Device Profile via the Save button The modified Device Profile is still displayed below the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Device Profile Files branch of the DMS Explorer Ready At this point you know how to open and modify an existing Device Profile English Release 2012 09 58 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS 6 7 4 Starting and Stopping of Device Profiles Open the DMS Explorer e Open the D
306. yed If a notice refers to personal damages with the safety alert symbol then another notice may be added warning of property damage Qualified Personnel The device system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this documentation Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on the equipment Qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission to earth and to tag cir cuits equipment and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards Intended Use Please note the following Warning only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers approved or recommended by Siemens This prod uct can only function correctly and safely if it is transported stored set up and installed correctly and operated and main tained as recommended A This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or technical description and Trademarks All designations marked with are registered trademarks of Siemens AG Other designations in this documentation might be trademarks which if used by third parties for their purposes might infringe upon the rights of the proprietors Copyright Siemens AG 2012 All rights reserved Reproduction transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority Offenders will be liable for damages All rights including rights created by
307. ystem and ensure that the STS Explorer is displayed at the left side of the Storage System workspace Functionality e Within the STS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt YourLocation gt Loading Profile Files branch e Drag one of the below Loading Profiles with the left mouse into the empty space at the right side of the STS Explorer A Loading Profile Editor of proper type is opened automatically and displays the dropped Loading Profile Loading Profile Settings Loading Profile Parameters Default Time Configuration Included Data INo Enabled Loading Mode Loading Parameters Minimum Time Time Interval Maximum Time _ 1 Each Value N A Changes only Hysteresis 1 000 Interval only Interval s 0 100 Changes and Interval Hysteresis 1 000 Interval s 0 100 Each Value N A Each Value NAA Each Value N A Each Value N A WIAA _ 2 _ 3 Al 5 8 Hz Data Time Configuration Excluded Data No Enabled Name 1 4 2 Dragkdrop the data which shall be excluded from the MDS Explorer New hee Sas Save As Figure 35 LPE Standard T001 with an opened Loading Profile e The opened Loading Profile can be edited now After editing the Save and Save As buttons are used in order to save the edited Loading Profile with all of its settings Try it out gt Open an existing Loading Profile gt Enter some additional data which shall be loaded a
308. yzing Model which also contains the dropped Analyzing Function is opened automatically o Instead of an Analyzing Function from the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Libraries gt Analyzing Functions branch also a User Function from the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Libraries gt User Functions branch can be dragged into the empty Analyzing System o This method works only in case the target X Tools Server is present but it is more convenient and faster as it automatically also determines the target X Tools Server of the new Analyzing Model English Release 2012 09 81 182 SIPLUS CMS X Tools User Manual 01 Introduction SIPLUS CMS e Method 3 for the creation of a new Analyzing Model o This method works only in case the AME Standard T001 is defined as Default Editor for Functions within the Global Options Editor of the X Tools Client o Within the MDS Explorer expand the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Online Data or the Main gt Servers gt YourServer gt Offline Data branch o Drag an online or offline data from the MDS Explorer into the empty Analyzing System workspace An AME Standard T001 with a default Analyzing Model which also contains the dropped data is opened automatically o This method works only in case the target data is present but it is more convenient and faster as it automatically also determines the target X Tools Server of the new Analyzing Model
309. zing Model has been updated and saved it can be started again In rare cases it can happen that the Analyzing Model can not be updated automatically In such a situation the Analyzing Model Editor provides detailed information about the functions which could not be updated and the update can be performed manually then 4 1 3 4 Update from V 03 01 SP1 or earlier to V 03 05 4 1 3 4 1 Parallel Installation to the old Version With V 03 02 of X Tools the internal directory structure has been changed Therefore overwriting of the previ ous installation of X Tools can not be performed fully automatically The following steps must be performed in order to perform the update e Create the backup of your existing installation of X Tools see point 4 1 3 1 e Remove the write protection from all files of the installation directory o Call the context menu for the installation directory within the Windows Explorer and select Properties o Deselect the Read only attribute and press Apply o Inthe upcoming dialog choose Apply changes to this folder subfolders and files and press OK e Start the installation of the new version of X Tools by launching of Setup exe from the installation me dia o Within the setup do not specify the current installation directory of X Tools as target directory for the ongoing installation Instead use another empty directory as target directory e After the setup has been completed

SIPLUS CMS4000 X-Tools - User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents